eT SE aS teem, F. Tb ateh tis sOateant A "ites me! ar - werwe € ' 490 ‘ ' uy : #69 ince ae ue frintteints i ae 7 Lv . “, _" ' n Ne We beet, CRUE § ; 4 - >. ' heat" heueh isin uo nents “ * a att . leet bb 5 FT) Pa ene eet % Pat Art io " ' M ' “ire / wee He Pe Nala @onnay vag pine oar oe er et bt Ab HA ge . _ ; i Sia tales Hae : nin hod . 7 oe ey iM 7 At Vey mn Fal Me ow) » ‘ + vinden he an Ps 2 “toledo theded Dib Rede feasial an: vista nga NER 4 ae ’ ‘ iq, h eigtena gy dei Merahia ”) 4 “ 0 ee ue rier ' ate 49) brace ° Haid: ' ‘ co " fot 26 Votre ene . elem ips eg BA, - 4 ern ’ <3 Figs: Tel SAT PO Angee | 7 , ; Fae At fi . ; bh eiinea by - . ; 7 taitteit Nat ‘i We s ‘ . Ve Aste i] j ’ v7 MM! roere P| Shaw Aaa MNS, ‘ , ; ied Vl Tt te A. Mabe dy UL @ hur tf 0 * share a te aN sas My Oe. : tity Mieetadit ait! Wilave { ~~ 7 A \ . ey Vr amee, r Sah. hin ythaxe > f eine wt cana iis ae é eh bawny “4 4%! Jt . ba ATP ing dg bgt tem) - ™ ’ “ ; ian ’ 4 ae 4 ren, rT , ‘ up ee aL We 4 Mie Mghaa * 4 , ' ; ‘ ' ' 0 my CESSES TLPY SEW tah : . Matlan sh bes Buanin 4 ; te f Meas ter hi A bls? be ae Pt teh ih it whines saanian tit NSa 4b es, ’ rae A Daly tes inary . i ay} x44 ay weaceh aha de . ¢ ’ bed thud s' S08 tay Sg . TUTE wee rer ; a Wb Ma cerlr tig be St ieicea ras wet J ' ’ . Ge WANS beads ¢ : ‘ " , ne WME NI MS ‘ip erghinity Sagasiad! Fiakdnemint be ! f , Mites: }: yy. bi ty pn aes sats hatin pra : | cpr ak Ia Raids neers anche shies . . . , , ty » o” oh j ; : ' " quan tacos \ingh alae I " “tiie . es Y J . : e on y , : ; Pit ve + fe meta ; ’ iee*) legit nara rina} he Ye : #044 Maat uleng hing yy MH Pier: : ; ‘ t en the BALLIN) . ' "; N44 Dar RY, pany, NAVE Sanin ay panty 4 a : ‘ Vdnbled » fea ate _ a 5 heb ah ri pbk vee: : / ' ay PONE Ne ” ‘ : ‘ % ‘N 4 7 3 a TOME Eons og soa ne ¥ 7 ‘ ; . fate : ay Ae e has fe " ' : fai eke ret ye Ieee Wor ' wt ha! y . ' a supe . ‘t, aos . : ; + Erect % . ' 4 hs sm oe is ' nes Us A, iY f " . ’ me Des ey Wek: i retiate 4 ‘ a7 Fy %, aa *9 hater sy Pare rry ’ , : ' hi dad De Set coe | bs gin & ’ ‘ Joy eek 4 waee rhe ’ : #157 “ 1 : " mnaceny rnb ' be “al hh ~ ; ah = Hea we an . = ah Si at phere ‘ x . ¢ A y ' , ’ > : f , ,) . . i Mat J 4 4 } ' ‘ 4 ‘ . Ph = * N : id 2 . ‘ hs Fin: jd 1 i et , ae / ts “te M i iene poe la j > ’ sgh ¢ is fio. at Vi. my rier utapet et {dear ee i \. " s . ‘ ‘ Z 7 X 4 i ta ie \y . _ : é ¥ t i b * / : ° ae ae pay t Mh ceiaat ated 7 ie pS . ‘ 4 ry 4 : im, viel ad . , / Hy ot ary ght seis * ‘ ‘i i as he, ’ a r ‘ ferMpane , be ’ ‘} ; F f « i Oty aly \ r “ pS et i i * a; ; ' , } ’ . ry H Fi f we y ‘ ‘ ; ¥ 4/4 tasye 5¥iy 1 be f+. i ’ : . es Sa r ete. hs ' rer ye 5 We tart! t i . ‘ hd i we A } : ; Beak betta aa un . ~ bi a yw +e ‘ a Pa he ; Mayet q ‘ ke ‘ rik + . { t rar | Y oy ibe diy’ ‘vray a4. bg al os J yy Phy at Ha ee ty YOS Vay ee , Ps ‘ whe yee wid 4* AY 1h reds ws ; Le NGM Aye i Bb ; ‘ vr “ey. Ave ref wT ct eb te wie Pits . 4 : os Nah wale : . : nh ys pestis ltr ary ‘ ' hoe Asa Gh 40d 4 idikneabatier a ‘4 . yy yr 4 Math be : F Memadq ster tel ott ¥ viseakt age ‘ie rate : NY de: Maat yy Aaa rab m0 vy Tey , \ ny sve aay “AN eign + ve ' 2 mn sis i aeye pe yse Ku } if ‘ ts he ak tie re rota . Onis ' Najine . 7 ‘ 4 M itaustce Rate : ' dt ‘ one a ; ong a Vip lists Hut abil Aghiy! mat: al yma ‘ f ‘ ed bad Hee phe or%y yy tae ‘ rt ‘ 14 AIP MA sty pine tN a Mh Ps oe] ‘ a Heyl oir 3 * ais: ‘ ‘ ‘t+ Bt bs ; ‘ br thi + Bint vist La j pe ' “Ny tires aytys ‘ ' ia ; * aot) etd oo ssn tietalen P 4 we . 4 21s i9 eg yty ony ke Ware ‘ f ' ‘ tos det “3 Ghee a Hen iegyy “4 PS er Na nv ters» ' i El pon edyege pent nf aan set iela git bey M ents wh ayeye “a Se fed a : ~ phrste ci! , eS dasied DED ia Gras i% ' s hey sate sotetdy a re : ' t Mabe LAL sl it; Talo Sai he 3 ‘ hes ow by yw PN ge hh ite ye bias ah i ' ‘ ‘ wy tee avin sub Kas vibe reat : ' fo le ‘ iy me . " hig mniaty ” ites ‘ : id titel wth ad tenhy t ; q SYM pt legs ete & i ; ' “4 gabe bel vias ‘ bydde Rr VR eh ly WF sa ARS ' gis ” 2 ‘ ’ Sn sty Tha ee | 4 meas} aac nies el brat ‘ i e ’ reise ' ' ‘ i 2 ‘ Z ‘ . ’ } ' ! 7 . 1 aS mt ‘ o 4 ' vs , v Y ~~ | ’ ‘ ‘ , , i . ” . : R f 4 ; i . an , ‘ : ng t " ' dee) £4. ab ip tL sais iP é S12 Fuh i); Kh Ake Pa LH} ST aie RETREAT FROM ASHANGO-LAND. A WOURNEY TO ASHANGO-LAND, AND FURTHER PENETRATION INTO EQUATORIAL AFRICA. By PAUL B. DU CHAILLU, AUTHOR OF ‘‘ EXPLORATIONS IN pacidamors AFRICA,” **MY APINGI KINGDOM,” “WILD LIFE UNDER THE EQUATOR,” “LOST IN THE JUNGLE,” ETC. POTAMOGALE VELOX. MYTHOMYS OF GRAY. WITH MAP AND ILLUSTRATIONS. 2a a NEW “YOUR Ris: HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE, 1874. By Paul Du Chaillu. THE COUNTRY OF THE DWARFS. Illustrated. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. MY APINGI KINGDOM. Illustrated. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. LOST IN THE JUNGLE. Illustrated. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. WILD LIFE UNDER THE EQUATOR. Illustrated. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. STORIES OF THE GORILLA COUNTRY. _ Illustrated. 1z2mo, Cloth, $1 75. EXPLORATIONS AND ADVENTURES IN EQUATORI- AL AFRICA. [Illustrated. New Edition. 8vo, Cloth, $5 oo. A JOURNEY TO ASHANGO LAND, and Further Penetra- tion into Equatorial Africa. New Edition. Illustrated. ' 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. Published by HARPER & BROTHERS, New York. (EB Sent by mail, postage prepaid, to any part of the United States, on receipt of the price. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1867, by D.. APPLETON & Co, In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York, By Trance PREFACE. —_—-1Oo THE position of an explorer of unknown countries in England is peculiar, and very difficult. If he returns home with nothing new or striking to relate he is voted a bore, and his book has no chance ot being read; if he has some wonders to unfold, con- nected with Geography, the Natives, or Natural History, the fate of Abyssinian Bruce too often awaits him: his narrative being held up to scorn and ridi- cule, as a tissue of figments. It was my lot, on the publication of my first volume of travels in Equatorial Africa, to meet with . a reception of that sort from many persons in England and Germany. In fact I had visited a country pre- viously unexplored by Huropeans—the wooded region bordering the Equator, in the interior of Western Africa—and thus it was my good fortune to observe the habits of several remarkable species of animals found nowhere else. Hence my narrative describing unknown animals was condemned. The novelty ct the subject was too striking for some of my critics; and not only were the accounts I gave of the animals and native tribes stigmatized as false, but my journey into the interior itself was pronounced a fiction. vi PREFACE. Although hurt to the quick by these unfair and ungenerous criticisms, I cherished no malice towards my detractors, for I knew the time would come when the truth of all that was essential in the statements which had been disputed would be made clear; I was consoled, besides, by the support of many emi- nent men, who refused to believe that my narrative and observations were deliberate falsehoods. Making no pretensions to infallibility, any more than other travellers, [ was ready to acknowledge any mistake that I might have fallen into, in the course of com- piling my book from my rough notes. The only revenge I cherished was that of better preparing myself for another journey into the same region, providing myself with instruments and apparatus which I did not possess on my first exploration, and thus being enabled to vindicate my former accounts by facts not to be controverted. It is necessary, however, to. inform my English readers that most of the principal statements in my former book which were sneered at by my critics, have been already amply confirmed by other travellers in: the same part of Africa, or by evidence which has reached England. I may first mention the geographical part of my work. No portion of my book was more discredited than the journéys into the interior, and it will. be recollected by many persons that the learned geo- grapher, Dr. Barth, a man whose great attainments and services as an African traveller I esteemed most PREFACE. vil ‘highly, published his disbelief in these interior explo- rations altogether. A map is in existence, showing the probable extent of my journeys according to Dr. Barth, and it marks my various excursions as not being in any case more than a few miles from the coast. My visit to Ashira-land, and discovery of the Ngouyai River, were thus considered pure inventions Dr. Petermann, the well-known geographer, in con- structing his map of my journeys, published in the ‘Geographische Mittheilungen’ in 1862, took into consideration the doubts of Dr. Barth and others, and though not so extreme a sceptic himself, believed it necessary to move all the positions I had given of places visited, much nearer the coast, so as to reduce greatly the length of my routes. It must be recollected that I made no pretension to close accuracy In my own map. [f had no instru- ments, and projected my route only by an estimate, necessarily rough, cf the distances travelled. The circumstance. of having been the first to explore the region was, besides, a disadvantage to me, for I had no previous map, however rough, to guide me; and in travelling with negroes day after day, under the shade of forests, often by circuitous routes, I was misled as to the length of the marches I made towards the east. I was therefore inclined to accept the correc- tions of Dr. Petermann, who had studied well the sub- ject, and adopted his map in the French edition of my ‘Equatorial Africa.’ It was not long, however, before fresh evidence arrived, which proved that Dr. Peter- viil PREFACE. mann had gone too far in his corrections. In 1862 a French Government expedition, under Messrs. Serval and Griffon Du Bellay, explored the Ogobai river, and not only proved the general truth of my account of that great stream, but showed that the country of the Ashira, visited by me, had not been placed far wrong. Dr. Petermann, on the receipt of the French map, published in the ‘Revue Maritime et Coloniale,’ reconstructed his own map, and again moved my principal positions nearly to the same longitude in which I had originally placed them. The text accompanying the map (‘ Geographische Mittheil- ungen,’ 1863, p. 446 et seq.), contains an explana- tion, couched in terms which I cannot but consider as highly flattering to me. | Similar confirmation of the accounts I gave of the cannibal Fans have been published by Captain Burton, the distinguished African traveller, and by others. The fact of the native harp possessing strings made of vegetable fibre—my statement of which roused a violent outburst of animosity against me—has been satisfactorily confirmed by the arrival of several such harps in England, and the examina- tion of their strings. Other disputed facts I have discussed in the body of the present volume; such for instance as the structure and affinities of that curious animal the Potamogale velox, concerning which an eminent zoologist, Professor Allman, has published a memoir, in which he shows that my critic was wrong, and I was right. With regard PREFACE. ix to the accounts I gave of the existence of several distinct varieties, if not species, of chimpanzee, in the present absence amongst naturalists of a definite criterion of what constitutes a species, I must con- tent myself by repeating that the negroes always distinguish these different kinds, and zoologists have published scientific descriptions of more than one species, considered distinct, from other parts of Western Tropical Africa. Concerning the gorilla, the greatest of all the wonders of Western Equatorial Africa, I must refer my readers to the body of the present volume for the additional information I have been able to gather, during my last journey, concerning this formidable ape. It was not my object on the present journey to slaughter unnecessarily these animals, as the prin- cipal museums in civilized countries were already well supplied with skins and skeletons, but I devoted myself, when in the district inhabited by the gorilla, to the further study of its habits, and the effort to obtain the animal alive and send it to England; hop- ing that the observation of its actions in life would enable persons in England to judge of the accuracy of the description I gave of its disposition and habits; at least to some extent, as the actions of most animals differ much in confinement from what they are in the wild state. I had the good fortune again to see the gorilla several times in its native wilds, and ob- tained several living specimens through the natives. Some of the statements relating to its habits, suck x PREFACE, as its association only in very small bands, I have found reason, on further observation, to modify; but with regard to its beating its breast when enraged, and the savage nature of the young animals, as compared with young chimpanzees, fresh observa- tions have confirmed my former statements. I suc- ceeded in shipping one live gorilla for London, but, to my regret, it died during the passage. | The principal object I had in view in my last journey, was to make known with more accuracy than I had been able to do in my former one, the geographical features of the country, believing this to be the first duty of a traveller in exploring new regions. To enable me to do this I went through a course of instruction in the use of instruments, to enable me to fix positions by astronomical observa- tions and compass bearings, and to ascertain the alti- tudes of places. I learnt also how to compute my observations, and test myself their correctness. It is for others to judge of the results of my endeavours in this important department of a traveller’s work ; I can only say that I laboured hard to make my work as accurate as possible, and although I was compelled, much to my sorrow, to abandon photo- graphy and meteorological observations, through the loss of my apparatus and instruments, I was fortu- nately able to continue astronomical observations nearly to the end of my route. In camp at night, after my work with the sextant was done, I spent the still hours in noting down the PREFACE. x1 observations, making three copies in as many dif- ferent books, entrusted to different negro porters, so as to lessen the risk of loss of the whole. In our disastrous retreat from Ashango-land one only of these copies escaped being thrown into the bush, and this was the original one in my journal, where the entries were made from day to day; but it is not quite complete, as one volume out of five of my _ journal was lost with nearly all the rest of my outfit. On my return to England, the whole of these obser- vations were submitted by the Council of the Royal Geographical Society to Mr. Edwin Dunkin, the Superintendent of the Altazimuth Department at Greenwich Observatory, who computed them, and furnished the results which are printed at the end of this volume, and which form the basis of the map of my routes now given to the public. I have thought it best to print also, without alteration, the original observations for latitude, longitude, and heights in the order in which they occur in my journal, and in- cluding a few that were incorrect. By this means cartographers will be able to see on how many sepa- rate observations a result for latitude or longitude is founded, and judge what degree of reliance may be placed upon them. I think it would be better if all travellers in new countries published in the same way, at the end of their narratives, their ori- ginal observations, instead of the computed results solely, as is generally done. Adopted positions are generally the mean of the results of several obser- Xil PREFACE. vations, and unless the original data are published, geographers and future travellers are unable to judge to what degree the separate observations differed, or what reliance is to be placed on the observing powers of the earlier traveller. | In giving to the public a much-improved map of the field of my African explorations south of the Equator, Iam glad to have been able to correct the errors of my former one. Most of the principal posi- tions were there placed much too far to the east and north; and even those given by Dr. Petermann in his second map, already mentioned, prove to be a few miles too far in the same direction. Mr. Dunkin has stated, at a meeting of the Royal Geographical Society, that he considers the position of Mayolo as perfectly well determined by my observations : this may there- fore be considered a fixed point by cartographers in reviewing my geographical work. But I must men- tion that two places, to the west of Mayolo, namely, Niembai and Obindji, have been placed on my map according to a calculation of distances travelled, as I had taken only one observation at each place. By the position of Mayolo, and that of the Samba Na- goshi Falls, visited by me in the last journey, "have been able to correct greatly the course given in my former map, and adopted by Dr. Petermann, of the great River Ngouyai. Unfortunately, my longitudes — of these places render it difficult to connect my map with that given by Lieutenant Serval, of the Ogobai between Lake Anengue-and the junction of the PREFACE. Xili Okanda. It would appear that M. Serval has ex- tended the Ogobai much too far east. The second French expedition under Messrs. Labigot and Touchard, which carried the exploration of the Ogobai as far as the junction of the Ngouyai and Okanda, has probably made observations which would enable us to settle this doubtful part of the geography of the region; but I have been informed by my friend M. Malte-Brun, that the results of the expe- dition are not yet published. Next to geography, I paid most attention, during my last expedition, to the study of the natives. My long experience amongst the tribes of the Fernand Vaz, and knowledge of the Commi and Ashira lan- guages, gave me some facilities in investigating the political state of the tribes, and comprehending their customs, the meaning of their legends, and so forth. There is no part of Africa hitherto visited by tra- vellers where the negro exists in a more primitive condition; for'in the regions of the Niger and the Nile he has been much modified by the influences of Mahommedanism, in the interior of South Africa by the incursions of the Boers, and in Eastern Africa by contact with Arab traders. The descriptions I _ have given in the present volume ought therefore to be of some interest, as representing the negro as he is, undisturbed by the slave-dealing practices, the proselytism or the trading enterprise of other races. The irreparable loss of the collection of photo- graphs which I made myself on the earlier part of XIV PREFACE. the journey, as related in the narrative, compelled me to have recourse to some rough pen-and-ink sketches in my journal, which have served as guides for the engravings in this volume, which have been drawn by competent artists under my own direction. The pleasing duty now remains of thanking those gentlemen who have encouraged me by their sym- pathy and aid throughout my African explorations, or assisted me in the preparation of the present volume. To the Council of the Royal Geographical Society my first thanks are due, who have adhered to me in spite of adverse criticism from other quar- ters, and who were pleased to express their satisfac- tion with the geographical work I have performed, by presenting me with a testimonial at the last Annual Meeting of the Society. But I feel that I ought especially to thank the noble-hearted Pre- sident of the Society, Sir Roderick Murchison, who sped me on my mission with hopeful words, and wrote frequently to me whilst I was in Africa, encouraging me when [I stood sorely in need of it. To my honoured friend, Professor Owen, I am also indebted, for his steadfast support, and for the valuable Essay on my collection of African skulls which enriches this volume. Other friends who have assisted me I have mentioned in the course of my narrative, amongst them Commander George, my kind instructor in the use of astronomical and surveying instruments, and M. Claudet, my master in photography. I ought also to express my thanks PREFACE. $8 to Mr. Dunkin, for the great labour and care he has shown in personally computing my observations, and to Mr. J. R. Hind, the distinguished astronomer, for many acts of kindness. To Mr. Glaisher I am indebted for the benefit of his great experience in the testing of my aneroids. It was my good fortune, when preparing for my last expedition, to receive tokens of good-will from many persons, some of whom were personally unknown to me. I have mentioned in the body of the work the names of some of these friends; and I must not omit to add to the list those of Messrs: Howard and Co., who pre- sented me with an ample stock of quinine, which proved of great service to me. Lastly, I have to acknowledge my great obligation to my friend Mr. H. W. Bates, the well-known author of the ‘ Naturalist on the River Amazons,’ who has given me his advice and assistance in the preparation of my journals for publication ; and to another valued friend, Mr. George Bishop, under whose hospitable roof, on the banks of the Thames at Twickenham, the greater part of the present volume has been prepared for the press. ‘ i ‘ vee >) ni x te ie f >) <3 CONTENTS CHAPTER I. THE VOYAGE. Objects of the Journey—Preparatory studies—Difficulties in obtaining a passage—Departure from England—Arrival off the Coast—Miss the mouth of the Fernand Vaz—Return up the Coast—Excitement of the Natives—Old aequaintances—Changes in the bar of the River—Choice of a settlement near Djombouai’s Village—-Bonfires and rejoicings on the river banks—Commencement of disembarkation—Dangerous state of the shore—The boat upset in the breakers—Saved by the Negroes— Loss of instruments and stores .. .. .. «2 « «+ eo Page 1 CHAPTER II. THE FERNAND VAZ. Outlines of the Coast region—The Ogobai—Prairies of the Fernand Vaz— The Commi nation—Distribution of the Clans—Chief Ranpano and his Spells—News of arrival sent to Quengueza, King of the Rembo— Arrival of Quengueza—His alarm at the great wealth I had brought him—A pet Chimpanzee, and his departure for England—Visit to Elindé and the mouth of the river—My illness—Tenderness of Ran- pano—King Olenga-Yombi—Grand palaver of Commi chiefs—Permis- sion granted me to ascend the river into the interior—Visit to my old place and to Rinkimongani’s grave—Superstition of the natives—The Bola Ivoga—Rabolo’s fetich—Departure of the Mentor for England 18 CHAPTER III. EXOURSIONS IN SEARCH OF THE GORILLA AND THE IP?. Visit to King Olenga-Yombi—Storm on the Fernand Vaz—-Land journey to Aniambié—First traces of Gorilla—Form of its tracks—Drunken orgies of the King— Magic island of Nengué Neoma — Village of Nkongon Mboumba—Search of the Ipi, or great Pangolin—Its habits— 2 ™ XViil CONTEN'S. Villace of Mburu Shara—Nkengo Nschiego variety of Chimpanzee— Bowers of the Chimpanzee—Group of Gorillas in a plantain-grove— Their mode of walking—Horrid form of monomania—Akondogo brings a live Gorilla—Return to the Fernand Vaz—Three more live Gorillas —Account of their capture—Modification of opinions concerning the Gorilla. cc: ce <0.) eq) iw lhlee ) opt tee geet Uae ene ee CHAPTER IV. START FOR THE INTERIOR. Arrival of a fresh supply of Scientific Instruments—The first Steamer on the Fernand Vaz—Preliminary trip to Goumbi—Astonishment of the Natives at the fire-vessel—Despatch Collections to England—Live Gorilla embarked for London—His habits in confinement—Narrow escape of drowning when embarked—Preparations completed—Last look at the sea—Outfit—Body-guard of Commi men—Affecting part- ing scenes—I am deceived by Olenga-Yombi—The renowned doctor, Oune-jiou-e-niaré—Arrival at Goumbi—Observations to fix latitude and altitude of Goumbi—Quengueza’s invocation of his Forefathers—Dis- obedient Wives—Excessive Drought—Obindji—Opposition of Bakalai —Arrival of Ashira Porters—Passage of the hills to Olenda.. .. 60 CHAPTER V. VISIT TO THE SAMBA NAGOSHI FALLS. King Olenda, his great age—Preparations for the journey to the Falls— We cross the Ovigui—Opangano Prairie—Ndgewho Mountains—Bakalai Village—A flock of Gorillas in the Forest—The Louvendji River— Dibaou and the Ashira Kambas—Navigate the Ngouyai River—The Aviia Tribe—Village of Mandji—River Scenery—Nkoumou Nabouali Mountains—Nami Gemba—Village of Luba—The Spirit of the Falls— Village Deity—Arrival at Fougamou, the principal Fall—Legend of Fougamou—Night Encampment—Return to Dihaou—We sup on a poisonous serpent—Forced March through flooded forest to Olenda 88 CHAPTER VI. ASHIRA-LAND. Grand Palaver to discuss the route into the interior—I am forbidden to pass through the Apingi country—Messengers sent to the Chief of Otando— Changes in Ashira Customs—Decrease of Population—The Potamogale CONTENTS. ap.4 veloc—Its habits—My former description of this Animal—Visit to Angouka—Immense Plantation of Plantain-trees—Quarrel with Mpoto, nephew of Olenda—Difficulties and anxieties—First rumours of the Peano rea Naty hela eN hee Mad Pak See odd Ove “Page 114 CHAPTER VII. THE PLAGUE IN ASHIRA-LAND, Breaking out of the Small-pox Epidemic—Noble Conduct of Quengueza— Departure of Quengueza’s People—Illness of the Porters—My Commi Body-guard refuse to leave me—Departure of part of the baggage te Otando-land—Quengueza returns to Goumbi—Letters from Europe— Death of Mpoto—Death of King Olenda—His burial—Cemetery of the Ademba Chiefs—Wailing for the Dead—Death of Retonda—Arrival of Messengers from Mayolo—Distrust of the Natives—Trickery of Arangui—I am robbed by the Ashira People—Diminution of the Pestilence—Quengueza’s message to the people of Olenda .. .. 124 CHAPTER VIII. ' FROM OLENDA TO MAYOLO, Departure from Ashira-land—-Passage of the Ovigui—Slave Village of King Olenda—A Slave Chief—Difficulties with the Porters—More Robberies—IIIness of Macondai—Leave him behind—The Otando Range of Hills—Picturesque Cascade in the Forest—Cross the Louvendji— More difficulties with the Porters—Hunger in the Forest—Men sent to Mayolo for Relief—A Night in the Forest—Myth of Atungulu Shimba —Koola Nut-trees—Search for Food—Meet with a Gorilla—A Hungry Night—Unselfish act of the Ashira—Help arrives from Mayolo— Mpegui Nuts—Arrival in Otando-land .. .. .. « «. « 139 CHAPTER IX. MAYOLO. Arrival at Mayolo—Reception by the Chief—Discovery of more Losses— I accuse the Ashira—Their Flight—Seizure of a Hostage—Gathering of the Head men of Otando—Mayolo falls ill—I am attacked by Fever— Great Heat and Thunderstorm—Arrival of Macondai and Igalo—Their Ill-treatment by the Ashira — Loss of Photographic Camera and Chemicals — Surgical Practice of the Otando—A Female Doctor— Matrimonial Squabbles—Mayolo’s health improves—Witchcraft Ordeal Xx CONTENTS. | —My Speech to the People—Speech of Mayolo—Curiosity of the Otando—A Female Duel—'l'he Bashikouay Ants—A Precocious Thiet | —Méyolo again falls ill—Good news from the Apono country—Asto- | nishment of the Natives at the Musical-box and Magnets—Climate of Mayolo—Deposit of Dew—The Otolicnus—Recovery of Macondai— | The Alumbi Fetich—Departure from Mayolo .. .. . Page 156 CHAPTER X. THE OTANDO AND APONO REGION. (teographical Position of Mayolo—Splendour of the Constellations as seen from the Equatorial Regions—The Zodiacal Light—Twinkling of the Stars—Meteoric Showers—The Otando and Apono Plains, or Prairies —The Otando People a branch of the Ashira Nation—Their Customs— Filing the Teeth—Tattooing—Native Dogs .. .. .. o «. 208. CHAPTER XI. ANTS. The White Ants of the Prairies—The Mushroom-hived Termes—lInterior of their Hives—Three classes in each Community: Soldiers, Workers, and Chiefs—Their mode of building—The Tree Ants—Curious struc- ture of their Hives—Their process of constructing them—The Bark Ants—Curious tunnels formed by them—T'he Forest Ants—Large size of their Shelters or Hives—The stinging Black Ant .. .. . 213 CHAPTER XII. MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Leave M&yolo—Cross the Nomba Obana Hill—River Dooya—Arrival at Mouendi—Timidity of the Inhabitants—The Chief Nchiengain—Ar- rival of Apingi Men—Loss and Recovery of a Thermometer-—Nocturnal Reflections—African Story of the Sun and Moon—Smelling the White Man’s Presents—Passage of the Ngouyai—Hippopotami and Crocodiles ; seasons of their scarcity and abundance—Arrival at Dilolo—Opposition of the Inhabitants to our entering the Village—Pluck of my Commi Boys—Arrival at Mokaba—My system of a Medicine Parade for my Men .. eo ee oe ee eo ee ee oe eo eo ee -» 280 ~ CONTENTS. xX) CHAPTER XIII. THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. | Mokaba—Curiosity of the People—Renewed illness of Mayolo—His return to Otando—Nchiengain’s Speech—The Apono agree to take me to the Ishogo country— Description’ of the Apono Tribe—Their sprightly character —Arts —Weapons — Population— Description of Mokaba— Palm wine—Drunkenness—Ocuya Performances—Leave Mokaba— River Dougoundo—Arrival at Igoumbié—lInvitation from the elders of the village to remain there—Manners of the Ishogos—Description 0! Igoumbié — The Ishogo huts— Arrival at Yengué, in Ishogo-land Page 250 CHAPTER XIV. JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Village of the Obongos or Dwarf Negroes—Their Dwellings—Absence of the Inhabitants—The Elders and People of Yengué—Arrival of the Chief of Yengué—War Dance of the Aponos—Ceremony of the Mpaza —An uproarious: Night—Good conduct of the Apono Porters—The River Ogoulou—Geographical Position and Altitude of Yengué—Pass- age of the Ogoulou—March to the Plateau of Mokenga—Eastern Limits of Ishogo-land—Quembila, King of Mokenga—Palavers—Contention between Chiefs for the possession of the “ Ibamba”—Panic in Mokenga —Re-adjustment of Baggage—Ishogo Porters.. .. «2 o « 269 CHAPTER XV. FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. The Ishogos—Their Modes of dressing the Hair—Ishogo Villages - Picturesque Scenery—Granitic Boulders— Grooved Rocks — Leave Mokenga—Cross the Dongon— Continued Ascent— Mount Migoma —The River Odiganga—Boundaries of Ishogo and Ashango-lands— Arrival at Magonga—Plateau of Madombo—Mutiny of Ishogo Porters —An unfriendly Village—Elevated Country—Arrival and friendly Reception at Niembouai—The King’s Wives—Prejudices of the Commi Men—Hear of a large River towards the Hast—The Ashangui Tribe— The Obongos ry | ae ea ae Wee ee oo ae te aoe xxii CONTENTS. CHAPTER XVI. ASHANGO-LAND. Uloudy Skies of Ashango-land—Grand Palaver—Ishogo Porters dismissed —The Village Idol—Religious- Rites—Visit to an Obongo Village— Abodes and Habits of the Dwarf Race—Measurements of their Height —River Ouano—Singular Ferry—Mount Mogiama—lIts Altitude— Village of Mongon, its Latitude, Longitude, and Height above the Sea-level—Village of Niembouai Olomba—lIts picturesque Site-—Ba- shikouay Ants—Ascend Mount Birogou Bouanga—Its Altitude—More Troubles—Robbed by the Ashango Porters—Summary Measures— Resume our March—Arrive at Mobana—Departure of a Bride—Arrival at Monaco Kombo... .« 4s.) ssecatel yee teenies = een eee CHAPTER XVII. FATAL DISASTERS AT MOUAOU KOMBO. Unpromising state of affairs on arnving at Mouaou Kombo—Rakombo is threatened—Obstacles raised by the Villagers—Fair promises of the Chief—A Secret Meeting of the Villagers—Demands of the People— We leave the Village—Night Encampment in the Forest—Threats and Promises from the next Village—Invited to return to Mouaou—Re- conciliation—Arrival of a hostile Deputation from the next Village— A Man accidentglly Shot... >; s3. 7s Wor yA eee oe oe, 5 loner CHAPTER XVIII. - RETREAT FROM ASHANGO-LAND.. A Palaver proposed to settle the Death of the Man—A Woman killed— The War Cry !—Retreat commenced—Igala and myself wounded with Poisoned Arrows—Narrow Escape of Macondai and Rebouka—We are closely pursued by the ‘Natives—Collections and Note-books thrown into the Bush—We make a Stand—Two Men Shot—Pursuit continued —I am wounded a second time—Igalo shoots the Bowman—We make another Stand—Cross the Bembo—Pass Mobana—Still pursued—Make a final Stand—The Pursuers driven off at last—A Halt—The Party all collected together—Sleep in the Forest—Night-March through Niembouai — Friendly conduct of the Head Chief — We are well received at a Plantation—Arrival of Magouga—We continue the March Ma) TO OamG ©. 3. oe. wn 0s | ge ~ ok ies cae ee CONTENTS. Xxiii CHAPTER XIX. * JOURNEY TO THE OOAST, - Arrival at Mongon—Magouga recounts the Story of our Adventures to the Villagers—Reach Niembouai—Mistrust of the People—Restitution of Stolen Property—Magouga consents to guide us to Mokenga—Reach the last of the Ashango Villages—Passage into Ishogo-land, and out of danger of Pursuit— Magouga’s Diplomacy—Arrival at Mokenga— Friendly Reception—Magouga delivers us safely into the hands of the Villagers—My Men exaggerate the Deeds of Valour they had performed —Arrival at Yengué—Project of descending the Ogoulou in a Canoe— Lose our Way — Distant View of the Apono Prairie—Igoumbié — Reach Mokaba—The Ngouyai—March to Nchiengain’s—Cross the River —Nchiengain’s Village—Reception at Mayolo—Operation of the African Law of Inheritance—March to Ashira-land—Alarm of the Ashira People—Avoid Olenda—Sojourn at Angouka’s—Cross the Ofoubou— Quengueza’s Encampment—Sorrows of the old King—Devastations of the Plague at Goumbi—Quengueza wants to go to the White Man’s Country—Descend the River—Arrival at “ Plateau "—Gratitude of the Commi People—Departure for England... .. .. .. « Page 371 CHAPTER XX. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY AND OLIMATE, Great Forest of Equatorial Africa—Scanty Population—Scarcity or absence of large African Animals—Hilly Ranges—River Systems—The Ogobai —French exploring expeditions— Amount of rain—Seasons—Rainy climate of Central Equatorial Africa—Temperature—Heat of the sun’s rays—Coolness of the forest shades .. .. «2 «2 cf oF «« 406 CHAPTER XXI. ETHNOLOGY. Isolation of the tribes in the interior of Western Equatorial Africa—Scan- tiness of the Population—Divisions of tribes and clans—Patriarchal form of Government—Comparison of Customs between Western Equa- torial tribes and Eastern—Laws of inheritance—Cannibalism—Migra- tions always towards the West—Decrease of Population—Its Causes— The African race doomed to extinction .. .. oo oF «oF « 424 xxiv CONTENTS. APPENDIX I. Descriptions of Three Skulls of Western Equatorial ican aa Ashira, and Fernand Vaz—with some Admeasurements of the rest of the Col- lection of Skulls, transmitted to the British Museum from the Fernand Vaz, by P. B. Du Cuarniv. By Professor Owen, F.R.S., &c. Page 439 APPENDIX ILI. Instruments used in the Expedition to Ashango-land—Observations for Latitude—Observations for Lunar Distances—Heights of Stations— Synopsis of Results .. -. 2. s+ ‘ss s0 60 ae wee 461 APPENDIX III. Comparative Table of Words in several Languages of Western Equatorial Adrien ait) ce es. eee eet eee ee Ishogo Fashions—Male Head-Dress .. ..) 2.) uu we Ishogo Loom and Shuttle : Th fos" Approach to the Camp of the Obonso Dwvatts Se oaalt An African Group Fan Warriors. From a French Photoseiahnig " ; r : . Fan Woman and Child. From a French pe a be ee Skull, Male, Fernand Vaz .w Swit vo abu (Seely Male, Fan‘ Tribe 39 zee ge Be Skull, aged Female, Fan-Deibe 9/2.) a) (Al Map ee ee ee ee ee eo ee ee ee ee ee JOURNEY IN ASHANGO-LAND. CHAPTER IL. THE VOYAGE. Objects of the Journey—Preparatury studies—Difficulties in obtaining a passage—Departure from England—Arrival off the Coast—Miss the mouth of the Fernand Vaz—Return up the Coast—Excitement of the Natives—Old acquaintances—Changes in the bar of the River—Choice of a settlement near Djombouai’s Village—Bonfires and rejoicings on the river banks—Commencement of disembarkation— Dangerous state of the shore—The boat upset in the breakers—Saved by the Negroes— Loss of instruments and stores. Harty in 1863, after three years’ recreation in the civilized countries of Kurope and North America, I began to entertain the idea of undertaking a new journey into Western Equatorial ‘Africa. My main object in this journey was to attempt to penetrate still further into the interior than I had done hitherto, taking the route of the Fernand Vaz River, the starting point of my principal expedition in the former journey. I had also a strong desire to fix with scientific accuracy the geographical positions of the places I had already discovered, and to vindicate by fresh observations, and the acquisition of further specimens, the truth of the remarks I had published on the eth- nology and natural history of the country. Beyond 7s 2 THE VOYAGE. Cap. I this, there was the vague hope of being able to reach, in the far interior, some unknown western tributary of the Nile, and to descend by it to the great river, and thence to the Mediterranean. To qualify myself for such a task, I went through a course of instruction* in the use of instruments, to enable me to project my route by dead-reckoning and astronomical observations, and supplied myself with a complete outfit for this purpose, as well as for taking the altitudes of places above the sea-level. I also learnt practical photography,f and laid in a store of materials necessary to make 2,000 pictures, having felt the importance of obtaining faithful representa- tions of the scenery, natives, and animals of these remote countries. In natural history I did not expect to find many novelties near the coast, at least in the larger animals, but I took pains to learn what was most likely to be interesting to zoologists, and hoped to be able to make many discoveries in the far interior. Besides materials for preserving large animals, I provided myself with a stock of boxes, glass tubes, &c., in order to collect insects, worms, and the like classes of animals, which I had neglected in my former journey. I also took fifty pounds of arsenic for the preservation of stuffed specimens. My hope of traversing the whole of Equatorial Africa to the head of the Nile, although acting as a strong incitement to me, was kept secret, except from a few * Under Staff-Commander C. George, Map Curator, Royal Geographical Society ; to whom I am, besides, much indebted for the trouble he took in selecting instruments for me, and for his care in testing them. t Under M. Ciaudet, and his son M. Henri Claudet. ~ Cuap.I. DIFFICULTY IN OBTAINING A PASSAGE. 3 intimate friends. I was resolved, however, that if the achievement of this splendid feat should be denied me, I would spare no effort in advancing as far to- wards the east as was practicable, and in obtaining accurate information regarding those portions of the country which I might be able to explore. There is no direct trade between Hngland—or, indeed, between any part of Europe or America—and _ the Fernand Vaz, and this gave rise to the chief difficulty I had to encounter at the outset. How was I to get there? My outfit was too large to think of transhipping it from one port to another. I must here remind my readers that the mouth of the Fer- nand Vaz lies about 110 miles to the south of the Gaboon, which is the principal centre of trade in Western Equatorial Africa. What little trade there is is carried on by native boats, which pass from the Gaboon to the negro villages on the banks of the Fernand Vaz, by way of the narrow channels of the delta of the Ogobai River, thus avoiding the detour round Cape Lopez. The negro tribes of the Fernand Vaz have never had much communication with the white man; there is no permanent trading settlement there, although sometimes the captain of a ship may come with his vessel and put up a factory for a short time ; indeed, I must add that I was the first to ascend the river and make known its geography, its in- habitants, and its productions. I chose this river as the starting-point of my new exploration because I was already well known to the inhabitants of its banks, through my long previous residence amongst them; they loved me, and my life was safe in their 4 THE VOYAGE. Cuap. J. hands, and having acquired some influence over them, I could depend upon obtaining an escort to enable me to advance into the interior. I do not know any other point of the West African coast, between the Congo and the Niger, where I, or indzed any white man, could have any chance of penetrating more than a short distance into the interior. After making some inquiries, I found my best course would be to freight a vessel specially to take me to the Fernand e Yaz. I therefore engaged with the owners of the schooner Mentor, Captain Vardon, a little vessel of less than 100 tons measurement, and all preparations being complete, embarked on board of her at Graves- end on the 6th of August, 1863. Although I looked forward with great pleasure to my new journey of exploration, I left old England with a heavy heart. The land where I had received so much kindness and sympathy, so much genuine 4 hospitality, and where I had made so many true friends, had become to me a second home. I could not repress the feeling of sadness which came over me, aud the pang I felt at parting was the greater from the thought that I might never return from an undertaking beset with such various perils. We were detained with a crowd of other vessels off Deal, for several days, by a strong wind from the south-west. I was much struck, part of the time, by the strong contrast between the weather we had at sea and that which prevailed on shore. With us the wind was blowing strong and the sea rough, whilst on land the sun was shining beautifully on the golden corn-fields, and the reapers were at work gathering Cuap. I. ARRIVAL OFF THE COAST. 5D in the bountiful harvest. My ardent longing to be on shore with them and have a last look at the happy land of England was one day gratified, for Mr. Dom- brain, the ship-missionary of Deal, kindly took the captain and myself to the town, and we had a charm- ing drive through the country lanes. I never enjoyed the country so much. Every face we met seemed so pleasant, and Nature seemed so tranquil; I felt that England was more than ever dear to me. I will not weary my readers by a description of our voyage to the West Coast. As far as the weather and the captain were concerned, it was a pleasant one. We arrived at Accra, a British settlement, east of Sierra Leone, in the Gulf of Guinea, on the 20th of September. According to my agreement with the owners of the vessel, the Mentor ought to have sailed direct from this place to the Fernand Vaz, but I now made the discovery that she was ordered to call at Lagos. At this unhealthy spot I declined the invita- tion to go ashore. We left it on the 2nd of October, and after a few days pleasant sailing came in sight of the Commi Coast on the 8th of the same month. The part of the African coast in the neighbourhood of the mouth of the Fernand Vaz has a monotonous aspect as viewed from the sea. A long line of country, elevated only a few feet above the sea-level, stretches away towards the south, diversified here and there by groups of trees, and enlivened only at inter- vals of a few miles by a cluster of palm-clad huts of the natives, amongst which is always conspicuous the big house which the villagers construct for the “ fac- tory” that they are always expecting to be established 6 THE VOYAGH. Cnap. I. at their village. The mouth of the river itself is very difficult to discover. In my former journey it was recognisable only by the white surf which foamed over its bar, and by the flocks of fish-eating birds hovering in the air above it. The bar, however, seemed now to have shifted, for we passed by it with- out perceiving it. We sailed along the coast the same evening, and, after anchoring for the night, still continued the same course, under light sail, the next morning, looking out for some native canoe to come to us, and tell us our whereabouts. At length a canoe put off from the shore and came alongside, and we then discovered that we were several miles to the south of the Fernand Vaz. The head man of the boat recognised me, and thinking at first that I had come to establish a trading post at his village, could not contain his delight. He knew a few ‘words of English, and shouted out: “ Put down the anchor; plenty ivory ; load the ship in a fortnight!” It was a wretched take-down for the poor fellow to learn that I intended to establish my head-quarters in a rival village on the banks of the river. He wanted to make me believe that Ranpano, the chief of my former place, was dead, and that his village was seattered—this was the old African trick, which I knew too well to be deceived by. The fellow, in his spite and dis- appointment, on leaving us went out of his way to prevent other canoes from coming to us, and sO we were unable to get a pilot. As we returned up the coast, we saw the natives running about from house to house along the beach _ Cuap. I. OLD ACQUAINTANCES. ‘ in great excitement. In every village the big flag kept by the chiefs for this purpose was hoisted on the top of a long pole to attract the white man ashore to trade, and at night a line of bonfires shone along the coast. , At length, on the morning of the 10th, I recog- nised the country near the mouth of the river. We shortened sail, and two canoes soon put off and made for the vessel. In the first, as 1t approached, I recog- nised my old friend Adjouatonga, a chief of one of the villages belonging to the clan Adjiena, which occupies the mouth of the river. He climbed up the vessel’s side, and after shaking hands with the captain, advanced towards me to do the same. On my turning round to him, he stepped back in astonishment, and exclaimed— “ Are you Chaillie, or are you his spirit? Have you come from the dead? Tell me quick, for I don’t know whether I am to believe my own eyes; perhaps I am getting a kendé (fool).” The good fellow hugged me in a transport of joy, but so tightly and so long that I wished his friendship had been a little less enthusiastic, especially as his skin was dripping with a strong mixture of oil and perspiration. In the second canoe came another old friend, Sholomba, nephew of the chief, Ranpano, of my own village of former days. In short, I was surrounded by a crowd of old acquaintances, and had to listen to a confused account of the chief events that had happened since my departure, related by half-a-dozen eager informants. The next subject to be considered was how we were to get ashore. Sholomba assured me that the mouth .. 8 THE VOYAGE. Cnap. I. of the Fernand Vaz had changed much for the worse since I had left, and that it would be less dangerous to run a canoe through the surf to the beach than to attempt an entry into the mouth of the river. It was now the beginning of the rainy season, when the winds are less rough than in the dry season, but the surf, under the influence of the steady south-west winds, was still frightful. However, the first landing, in Adjouatonga’s boat, which was much steadier than the rest, was made with safety.’ The frail canoe was skilfully directed towards a promising roller at the right moment, and we were carried on its back with lightening speed to the beach, where we were snatched up by the natives assembled to meet us. After this hazardous landing, I was hurried along amidst a crowd of several hundred savages, all dancing and shouting with frantic joy, across the sandy tongue of land to the banks of the Fernand Vaz, where canoes were ready to take us up the river to the village of Ranpano. Although I had been absent only ice years— years so full of events to me!—time had wrought great changes in the scene of my former adventures. The mouth of the river had altered so much that I scarcely knew it again. The long, sandy, reed- covered spit, which formerly projected three miles from the southern point of the river's mouth, had disappeared; and the sea had washed up the sand so — much on the northern side that the village of Elindé, whose chief, Sangala, had given me so much trouble in former times, had become untenantable, and the people had removed. Many little islands had also been sub- CuaP. I. CHOICE OF A SETTLEMENT. s) merged or washed away, and I no longer saw those flocks of sea birds which formerly frequented the locality. Paddling up the stream we came to my old settlement, which I had called Washington; it was deserted and in ruins, a few loose bamboos and rotting poles alone remained to show me where it stood. The house of my honest old friend, Rinkimongani, was there, looking like a wreck, for this excellent fellow had gone to his rest and his family was scattered. After a brief survey of the altered state of the country, I resolved to fix my new quarters at a little village near the residence of Djom- bouai, two miles above my last place: the situ- ation was a good one, and, besides, it would con- ciliate the prejudices of the Commi, who opposed my settlement at the old spot on account of the suspicion of witchcraft which attached to it, and which had increased since the death of Rinkimongani. Meantime, the news spread that I had arrived in the country, and for several days people came trooping in by land and-water to see their old friend, and the stores of good things he had brought with him. Ran- pano was away from home, on the Ogobai River, but messengers were sent to him to hasten his return. I soon felt that I had returned to wild life. At night bonfires were lit, and the crowd of half-dressed and rude, but good-humoured, savages danced around them, and dinned my ears with their monotonous drumming and songs. | _ It was now necessary to return on board the schooner, and arrange the mode of disembarkation of my extensive outfit and stock of goods. As the 3 | 10 THE VOYAGE. Cuap. 1. mouth of the river had become so unsafe, from the breaking up of the sandy spit, and as no one knew the direction of the deep channels—for the whole breadth of the mouth of the river was one unin- terrupted line of breakers—we resolved to land everything on the beach through the surf. But on some days the breakers were so bad, continuing all day long without a single lull, that it was impossible to do anything. On the 15th of October we made a commencement. Three native canoes were brought alongside, and I began by loading them with my most valuable articles. In one of them I placed all my scientific instruments, sextants, chronometers, prismatic com- passes, barometers, &c., besides five large Geneva musical boxes (intended as presents to the native chiefs), and five barrels of salt meat, a case containing 1,500 rifle bullets, a box of medicines, and many other things. Captain Vardon and myself. embarked in this boat on account of the value of its cargo, and away we went amidst the cheers of the dusky paddlers. The two other canoes took the surf first. The rollers were terrific, and the boats seemed buried in the seething spray without a chance of coming out of it safely, but they reached the shore without up- setting. The captain himself had misgivings as to the result of our venture. I advised him to put on his life-belt, but in the excitement of the moment he neglected the precaution. We now came near the _ ranges of breakers, and our only chance of safety was to ride on: the back of one of those smoother rollers Cuap. l. BOAT UPSET BY THE BREAKERS. 11 which from time to time swelled up and arched gently over, but with headlong speed, towards the shore. We had not, however, the good fortune to be borne by it in safety; our boatmen, in their great anxiety to avoid a mishap, were not venturesome enough, they waited a few moments too long. In- stead of carrying us onward, the huge wave broke over our canoe, upsetting it and hurling us to a distance away from it. Heavy, short breakers now succeeded each other with awful rapidity; the sea all around became one mass of foaming billows; and in a few moments we were almost exhausted with the buffetings we received. The negroes who had formed the crew of the canoe, most of whom were my own “boys,” companions of my former expedition, swam towards me, and with great exertions kept me from sinking. They assisted me to divest myself of my shoes and my coat, the pockets of which were filled with small weighty articles, and as I became weaker, through the effects of drinking so much salt water, they swam under me and buoyed me up with their own bodies. I caught a glimpse of poor Captain Vardon at a distance from me, struggling with the waves; the men had devoted all their attentions to me, so I shouted to some of them to go and help him. Meantime, several unsuccessful attempts were made by the negroes ashore to launch canoes to the rescue, but they were all swamped one after the other. No- thing could be done until the tumult of the waves subsided ; for after the breakers have spent their fury there is usually a lull, and it is during these lulls, which are, however, very uncertain and limited in tt 12 THE VOYAGE. Cuap. J. their duration, that the only chances occur of reaching this difficult shore. When the sea is rough, in the height of the dry season, these lulls do not occur for days together. A favourable moment at length arrived ; a canoe reached us, and we were delivered from our perilous situation. | This was the fifth time durimg my experience of this coast that I had been upset in the breakers, and saved by the exertions of these faithful negroes. After landing, the magnitude of the loss which I had sustained presented itself with full force to my mind. All my astronomical instruments were spoilt by the salt water, and with them the power of carrying out the principal object of my journey. There was no help for it but to submit to a weary delay, whilst a second set was sent for from England. As soon as I reached the shore, I found myself surrounded by the blacks; the women being con- spicuous by their sympathies. A general shout arose —‘‘ Who are the people who are jealous of us, de- siring the death of our white man?” In this country all misfortunes are attributed to some evil influence, bewitching the sufferer ; and they referred to the jealousy of some Beye eee village, the catastrophe from which I had so aBTrO ey escaped. Si.) 5 ee i 5, CHAPTER II. THE FERNAND VAZ. Outlines of the Coast region—The Ogobai—Prairies of the Fernand Vaz— The Commi nation—Distribution of the Clans—Chief Ranpano and his Spells—News of arrival sent to Quengueza, King of the Rembo— Arrival of Quengueza—His alarm at the great wealth I had brought him—A pet Chimpanzee, and his departure for Hngland—Visit to Elindé and the mouth of the river—My illness—Tenderness of Ran- pano—King Olenga-Yombi—Grand palaver of Commi chiefs—Permis- sion granted me to ascend the river into the interior—Visit to my old place and to Rinkimongani’s grave—Superstition of the natives—The _ Bola Ivoga—Rabolo’s fetich—Departure of the Mentor for England. In my former work on Equatorial Africa, I gave - my readers a short account of the neighbourhood of the Fernand Vaz and of the natives who inhabit this part of the West African coast. The country on both sides the river, which flows for some forty miles neatly parallel to the sea-shore, is for the most part level and of little elevation. Between the river and the sea the plain is sandy, and covered with a grassy and shrubby vegetation, with here and there a cluster of trees, and often a fringe of palm-trees by the river side. Travelling southward from the mouth of the river the “islands” of trees become larger, and unite to form a considerable forest, which contains many timber-trees of great size and beauty. This is to- wards Cape St. Catherine, where, between the river and the sea, les the inhospitable jungle which forms 14 THE FERNAND VAZ. Crap. II the principal home of the gorilla, of which I shall have more to say presently. Towards the north stretches the delta of the great Ogobai River, a much larger stream than the Fernand Vaz, with its network of channels densely fringed with mangrove-trees. The country on the right bank of the Fernand Vaz is thickly wooded, and consists principally of mangrove swamps. Thus, on one side of the broad sluggish stream, lies a tract of dense woodland, and, on the other, an expanse of open prairie. The Ogobai is the only West African river at present known, between the Niger and the Congo,-which rises far in the interior and breaks through the great coast range of mountains. One of the channels from the Ogobai combines with the Fernand Vaz a few miles from its mouth. About forty miles up stream the bed of the Fernand Vaz becomes contracted; higher up, wooded hills hem it in on both sides—the portals of the mountainous and picturesque African interior, and the river changes its name to ne meaning the River par excellence. The prairies of the Reena Vaz are not unhealthy. During the dry season, from June to September, a steady, strong, and cool sea-breeze blows over the land, without, however, raising dunes or sandy hil- locks of the beautiful white sand which forms the soil of the prairie. All the pools and marshes dry. up; and, before the continued dryness ‘has: parched up the herbage, the aspect is that of an extensive English park, especially when in the cool hours of early morning a herd of wild cattle (Bos brachy-. Cuap. II. THE COMMI TRIBE. 15 ceros) or a troop of antelopes, grazing by a wood- side in the distance, remind one, for the moment, of the cattle and deer of more cultivated scenes. But as the dry season continues, the grass dries up or becomes burnt, and the country then wears a more desolate aspect: the sky is generally overcast. In- numerable flocks of marabouts come to lay their eggs on the prairies ; the prodigious number of these birds and their sudden appearance are quite astounding. In the wet season the numerous pools and marshy places afford another attraction, for they teem with life; and I used to notice, especially, the quantity of eel-like fishes which appeared in a mysterious manner almost as soon as the pools began to form, they having no doubt buried themselves in the mud and passed the dry season in a dormant state. Flocks of sand-pipers trot along the sandy margins of the rivers | and pools, and numbers of gulls, terns, shear-waters, and pelicans enliven the scene with their movements and their cries. The plain along the banks of the river is dotted with villages of the great Commi tribe of negroes, whose plantations, however, are on the opposite wooded side of the Fernand Vaz, and also along the banks of the Npoulounay channel, as the sandy soil of the plain is unfitted for bananas, sugar- cane, and other cultivated plants and trees. Hach village is under the patriarchal government of its hereditary chief, and all are nominally subject to the king of the tribe residing at Aniambié, formerly a large village on the sea-shore near Cape St. Cathe- rine, but now reduced to a few dilapidated huts. The king lives on his plantation. © : : i pa ST eee es er he 16 THE FERNAND VAZ.. CRAP. s1. The clan of the Commi to which | was attached (Abogo) had several villages occupying the banks of the river for a few miles near its mouth. Its present ‘chief—at least the chief of the river-side villagers— was my old friend Ranpano, a slow, phlegmatic negro, with a pleasant expression of countenance and good honest intentions. The quality in Ranpano for which he was most lauded by the negroes was his habit of going to sleep when he was drunk, instead of quar- relling. His authority in the clan was less, how- ever, than that of Olenga-Yombi, the superior chief or king of the Commi tribe, which inhabits the Eliva, or Fernand Vaz district. : The distribution of the population comprised in a clan of these African tribes presents some curious features; for instance, the people under the imme- diate authority of Olenga-Yombi live near the sea- coast, about thirty miles to the south of the villages of Ranpano; thus they are separated, by numerous villages belonging to other clans, from the rest of their clan-relations. The head chiefship had be- longed to the family of Olenga-Yombi for many generations, and it shows the respect these primitive negroes entertain for hereditary rank that they con- tinue to acknowledge the sovereignty of the present representative of the title, although the villages under his immediate authority have declined greatly in population and influence. If I could succeed in preserving the friendship of these two men and that of Quengueza, the powerful chief of Goumbi, eighty miles further up the river, my objects in coming to the country would most Cuapr. Il. CHIEF RANPANO AND HIS SPELLS. 17 likely be attained, and I should not only meet with no political obstacle, but have all the assistance the coast tribes could give me to enable me to penetrate into the interior. I had brought goods for the trade-- loving Commi, to exchange with them for the produce of their country, in order to secure their good will. The people of the West Coast have no consideration for any one but a trader, and even amongst them- selves a man is more respected for his trading goods than for the territory or land that he possesses. My first object, therefore, was to settle myself for a few weeks amongst them, and cultivate the friendship ot the people and their chiefs. I sent Sholomba up the river to apprise Quengueza of my arrival, and mean- time went to pay my court to Ranpano, who had just arrived from the Ogobai. I knew that Ranpano had arrived during my absence on board the schooner, and I felt vexed that he was not amongst the number of those who waited for me on the beach when the accident occurred. I now learnt that he was in a hut at no great distance. Thither I went, and found the fat, grey-headed old fellow sitting motionless, with grave countenance, over a bundle of fetiches or mondahs, muttering his spells. I drew myself up, trying to look haughty, and reproached him for his indifference to the fate of his old friend, knowing, as he did, the dangers of passing the surf at this season. To all this he remained immoveable as a stone, and replied, pointing to his fetiches, “My white man die in the water? never, whilst I am alive! How could it be?” and, looking round at his people, he repeated, “ How could it be?” 18 THE FERNAND VAZ. Onap. I. I let the old man welcome me in his own way. Even his gloomy superstition could not in the end destroy the natural benevolence of his disposition. One night shortly after my arrival, after I had retired to bed in the hut lent to me by the negroes, I heard the sound of the native bugle on the river, and the songs of a multitude of paddlers. It was King Quengueza, who had arrived for the purpose of welcoming me back to his country. I got up at once, and found at the door the venerable chief; who received me with open arms, declaring that he could not go to sleep until he had embraced me, and had assured me of his enduring affection. When [ despatched Sholomba with a canoe to fetch him, to prevent any doubt on his part, and having nothing else to send him at the time, I sent him a bottle of brandy, the sight of which convinced him at once © that it was I and no other. I was truly glad to see this noble old chief, the King of the Rembo, or Upper River. He was a man of great and wide influence, not only on account of his hereditary rank, but also from the energy and dignity of his character. He was fond of Europeans, but I could never induce him to wear in public the fine European clothes I gave him; he had a firm idea that he should die if he put on any dress, as he was still in mourning for his brother, who had died several years before I made the old chief’s acquaintance. I felt and still feel the warmest friendship towards this stern, hard-featured old man; and, in recalling his many good qualities, cannot bring myself to think of him as an untutored savage. | zy & oe _ Cuap. II. i! ARRIVAL OF QUENGUEZA. 19 Next day Quengueza brought me as a present a very fine goat, the largest I had ever seen in Africa. Goats are regal presents in this part of the continent, and Quengueza had reared the one he brought with the express intention of giving it to me, if I should fulfil my promise of returning from the white man’s country. Our formal meeting next day was an im- portant one; and I chose the opportunity to renew our pact of eacaiahip. After the first cordial greetings were over, I told him, in a set speech, how I: had been received in America and Europe, and how his name, and the great service he had rendered me in enabling me to penetrate into the far interior, had become widely known among the nations of white men. I also told him, in a low whisper, that [ had brought from one of his well-wishers in England a present of a chest- full of fine things.* The old man rose in his turn, and made an eloquent reply. With the figurative politeness of a negro chief, he assured me that his town, his forests, his slaves, and his wives were mine (he was quite sincere with regard to the last), that henceforth he should have no will of his own, but that I might do whatever I chose, that “my belly should be full every day,” meaning that. I should never be hungry, and, what was of more importance, he would assist me with all his influence, and even accompany me, in my proposed journey towards the interior, quietly adding, in a tone not to be heard * My friend, Mr. John Murray, of Albemarle Street, gave me £50 for the purpose of bepress suitable presents for Quengueza and other chiefs, . bre rs 20 THE FERNAND VAZ. Cuap. IL. by the bygtanders, “If you love me, do not say a word to any one that you have brought me any presents.” During the interview I showed Quengueza, amongst other things, a copy of my book ‘ Adventures in Equatorial Africa,’ and pointed out to him the plate which represents him and myself seated in the palaver house of Goumbi. It delighted him amazingly: he shouted, “Am I then known so well in the white man’s country that they make-my picture?” Then turning with an air of ineffable contempt to the crowd around us, and pointing to the engraving, he said, “ Pigs, look here! what do you know about the white man? Quengueza is the white man’s friend; what would you ‘be without me?” He asked me who made the book. I told him it was the same good friend who had sent him such beautiful presents. He did not forget this; and the next day he put into my hands a handsome leopard’s skin, with the request that I would send it to the ntangani (white man) who had put him in a book and sent him so many things to do him good. Conforming to his wish for strict secresy regarding the presents, I appointed a day on which to receive him alone. He chose an hour in the afternoon when most of his people were asleep, enjoying the usual siesta. He came accompanied by a select party of relatives and wives, for kings in these parts must always be accompanied by some retinue or escort. But his Majesty was determined not to let'his people see what I was going to give him. Touching me gently with his elbow, he told me, in a whisper, to ae R le) eee : Cup. II. QUENGUEZA AND HIS PRESENTS. 21 send them all away, and not to let any of them come in. ~ Entering my hut alone, he closed the door, and, sitting down, told me that he was ready to see the presents I had brought him. The first thing that I displayed before his admiring eyes was the coat of a London beadle, made expressly to fit his tall figure, and, to please his taste, it was of the most glaring colours, blue, with yellow fringe, lined with red. There was also a splendid plush waistcoat. As his Majesty does not wear trowsers those articles did not form part of the suit, any more than did a shirt. “Let us try them on,” said the king, in a whisper ; but, before doing so, he went to the door to make sure that no one was peeping in. Having put on the robes, and taking in his hand the beadle’s staff, which I had not omitted to bring also, he asked for a looking-glass, in which he admired himself vastly ; whilst I completed the costume by placing on his head my opera-hat, which, to his utter astonishment, I had caused to spring up from its flattened state. After surveying himself for some time in the glass, with evident satisfaction, he drew himself up to his full height, and strutted up and down the room, “as happy as a king.” Having indulged his vanity for a few minutes, he replaced in the chest the various articles of this imperial. costume, and proceeded to inspect the other presents. I had myself brought a large amount of presents and goods for the old chief, and besides these I had many valuable articles of Kuropean workmanship, - some of which were purchased with money given me i, Liv 22 THE FERNAND VAZ. Cuap. IL by another friend* in England to lay out in presents for African chiefs, which I thought I could not better bestow than on the King of the Rembo. Amongst them were a quantity of silks and fine cotton goods, silver knives, forks, and spoons, gunpowder, trade guns, kettles, and, beads for his numerous wives. All were packed in chests secured with lock and key; the chests being an important part of the donation, for the propert of an African chief, in this part, is estimated in slaves, wives, and. chests. The sight of all this wealth almost dumbfoundered the old man. When I commenced showing the contents of the chests to him he stopped me, and said—*“ Do you love-me, Chaillie? Then do not tell the people what you have given me, or they will bewitch me.” There was an internal struggle between avarice and fear expressed in his countenance. His fear of witchcraft was a great defect in lis character as a chief, for it had led to the depopulation of Goumbi, his capital on the Rembo. Going to the door, he looked out to see that no one was listening; then he knelt down, and clasped my feet with his hands, and, with the stern lineaments of his face distorted by fear, begged me again to keep secret the account of the wealth I had given him. No sooner had he left me than I heard him declaring to his people that the white man had brought him nothing. As I approached, instead of being disconcerted by my appearance on the scene, he repeated the same statement, in a louder voice, but looked towards me at the same time with an expression of countenance that was clearly meant to * Henry Johnson, Esq., of 39, Crutched Friars. . EE Geb IC : A PET CHIMPANZEE. 98 implore me not to say a word to the contrary. ‘The people were smiling all the while, for they knew better, and were well acquainted with the ways of their beloved old chief. He would not remove the chests to his canoe in the day-time, but came at night, on the eve of his departure, when every one was asleep, and stealthily took them himself, with the aid of two slaves, down to the water-side. In a few days the vessel was unioaded, and my goods stored in several huts which were secured only by a door tied with a rope of lianas to the bamboo wall. . My property, however, was respected, and the honest Commi people did not rob me of a single article. Quengueza returned to Goumbi, and I gradually inured myself again to the climate and ways of the country. I made short excursions in various direc- tions, visited numerous petty chiefs, besides receiving visits from others, and stimulated them and their people to the collection of produce, that Captain Vardon might reload his vessel and return to Eng- land. As I have described the coast country at length in my former book, a few incidents only of my stay need be recorded here, together with some stray notes on the natural history, before I commence the narrative of my expedition into the interior. On the lst of November a negro from a neighbour- ing village brought me a young male chimpanzee about three years old, which had been caught in the woods on the banks of the Npoulounay about three months previously. Thomas, for so I christened my little protégé, was a tricky little rascal, and afforded 24 THE FERNAND VAZ. Cnap. Il. me no end of amusement; ke was, however, very tame, like all young chimpanzees. Unfortunately Thomas was lame in one hand, several of the fingers having been broken and healed up in a distorted position. This was caused by his having been mal- treated by the village dogs, who were sent in chase of him one day when he escaped from his captors and ran into the neighbouring woods. I had Tom tied by a cord to a pole in the verandah of my hut, and fed him with cooked plantains and other food from my own table. He soon got to prefer cooked to raw food, and rejected raw plantains whenever they were offered tohim. The difference in tameability between the young chimpanzee and the young gorilla is a fact which I have confirmed by numerous observations, and I must repeat it here as it was one of those points which were disputed in my f rmer work. A young chimpanzee becomes tame and apparently reconciled to captivity in two or three days after he is brought from the woods. The young gorilla I have never yet seen tame in confinement, although I have had four of them in custody, while still of very early age. One day I witnessed an act of Master Thomas which seemed to me to illustrate the habits of his species in the wild state. A few days after he came into my possession I bought a domestic cat for my house; as soon as the young chimpanzee saw it he flew in alarm to his pole and clambered up it, the hair of his body becoming erect and his eyes bright with excitement. In a moment recovering himself he ca:zze down, and rushing on the cat, with one of his feet seized the nape of the animal, and with the Unap. I]. THE CHIMPANZEE SENT TO ENGLAND. 25 other pressed on its back, as if trying to break its neck. Not wishing to lose my cat, I interfered and - saved its life. The negroes say that the chimpanzee attacks the leopard in this way, and I have no doubt, from what I saw, that their statement is correct. My pet preserved his good health and increased in intelligence and gentleness until the departure of Captain Vardon for England. I then sent him home, and on his arrival he was deposited by my friend in the Crystal Palace at Sydenham, where, I dare say, very many of my readers have seen him, and have laughed at his amusing tricks. I am credibly informed that his education at the Palace has become so far advanced that he understands what is going on when his own “ cartes de visite” are sold. Aiea , ae —_— GROUP OF BAKALATI. Cuap. V. OPANGANO PRAIRIE. 91 tiful prairie encircled by a wall of forest. This prairie was called Opangano. From it I-had a clear view of the Ndgewho mountains. At ten o'clock we arrived at a Bakalai village. Like many of the primitive villages of this warlike tribe, it was art- fully constructed for purposes of defence. The single street was narrow, barred at each end by a gate, and the houses had no doors in their cuter walls. This would effectually guard the place against nocturnal surprise by other Bakalai with whom the villagers might be at war. This mode of construction had also another object, namely, to allow the people to lull and plunder any party of traders whom they might entice into the village and prevent from escaping by closing the two gates. The neighbouring tribes, especially the Ashiras, dread the power and treachery of the Bakalai. The chief of the village was absent. I bought, for a few beads, a quantity of smoke-dried wild hog of one of the inhabitants. - Leaving this place at one p.m., we pursued a north- easterly direction, and passing gasatull other Bakalai villages, two of which were abandoned on account of some one having died there, reached at five o’clock the Lambengue prairie. It rained nearly the whole afternoon, and we had a. disagreeable walk through the mire and over the slippery stones of the forest paths. We built sheds, and passed the night in the prairie. 3rd. At six a.m. again on the march. My men were tired with the exertions of yesterday, for we had been wet all day, so, to keep them up to the speed, I led the column myself. We were soon buried again in the 92 VISIT TO THE SAMBA NAGOSHI FALLS. Cuap. V shades of the forest. It was a wild, desolate district, and I marched along in anything but a cheerful mood, thinking of the hard task I had imposed upon myself in attempting to cross Africa. I was going along, a little ahead of my party, when my reverie was suddenly disturbed’ by a loud crashing and rustling in the trees just before me. Thinking it might be a flock of monkeys feeding on some wild fruit-tree, I looked up, peered through the thick foliage, and was thoroughly roused by seeing on’ a large tree a whole group of gorillas. I had nothing but a walking-stick in my hand, but was so struck at the sight that I was rivetted to the spot. Meantime the animals had seen me, and began to hurry down the tree, making the thinner boughs bend with their weight. An old male, apparently the guardian of the flock, alone made a bold stand, and stared at me through an opening in the foliage. I could see his hideous black face, ferocious eyes, and projecting eye-brows, as he glared defiance at me. In my unarmed condi- tion I began to think of retracing my steps, but the rest of my party coming up at the moment, with clatter of voices, altered the state of things. The shaggy monster raised a cry of alarm, scrambled to the ground through the entangled lianas that were around the tree-trunk, and soon disappeared into the jungle in the same direction as his mates. How I regretted to have left my double rifle behind me at Olenda! I had this morning even divested myself of my revolvers, having given them to my man Rebouka to carry, as I wished to be in light trim for leading the day’s march, We were all =a 5 Mf i] Uh i p yi By VAN Pap ase Ps! Het Ay alt vagy i Wi Nh ug NEN NWS INS Sit i GORILLAS SURPRISED IN THE FOREST. Cuap. V. THE LOUVENDJI RIVER. 93 tired, and more or less unwell from the constant wet- ting we had had, and from sleeping in damp clothes. The gorillas were ten in number, and of different ages and sizes, but apparently all females except the one male. My men rushed after the beasts with their guns, but the chase was useless; the forest had resumed its usual stillness, and we continued our - march. At noon we arrived on the banks of the Louvendyji river, a stream similar to the Ovigui, and flowing from the south towards the great Ngouyai river, in which were the Falls of Samba Nagoshi. We break- fasted on the brink of this pleasant stream flowing through the silent forest; our breakfast, as usual, consisting of boiled plantains, poor fare for the weary traveller whose bones were aching with the effects of overwork and exposure. The altitude of the river-level above the sea, according to my ane- roids, was 490 feet. Resuming our journey about one p.m. we soon got into a district of swamps, and had to wade at times up to the waist. In places where the water was only ankle-deep the mud had a fetid smell. I found that my Ashira companions were taking me by a very roundabout way, and our journey was long and fatiguing, although we accomplished but a very moderate distance in a straight line. Their object was to avoid some of the Bakalai villages, with the inhabitants of which they had trade-palavers remain- ing unsettled. At half-past five p.m. we came again upon the Ovigui, where we had resolved to pass the night. As we emerged from the jungle, we were ea @ ee ee ee ee eee 7 , 94 VISIT TO THE SAMBA NAGOSHI FALLS. Cnap. Y. not a little surprised to see an encampment of natives. My Ashira companions soon fraternised with them, for they were Ashira Kambas who, with Dihaou their chief, were spending a few days fishing in the river. The chief received me with wild de- monstrations of joy, and thanked Olenda for sending the white man to him. 4th. Passed a wretched night. My bed was sim- ply a row of sticks, each about four inches in dia- meter, laid to protect me from the damp ground, and a foraging party of the horrible Bashikouay ants came in the middle of the night and disturbed us for about an hour, inflicting upon us severe bites. Early in the morning we embarked on the Ovigui in a long, narrow, leaky, and cranky canoe, provided by the chief to enable us to make the rest of our way by water. The Ovigui was now a wide and deep stream, with a rapid current. We were nearly upset several times in the course of the first hour of our voyage. At the end of the hour we came to the mouth of the Louvendji, which here joins the Ovigui. In my former journey I was under the impression that the Louvendji falls into the Rembo, but it does not. It joins the Ovigui before that river falls into the Rembo. Below this we passed several Bakalai and Kamba villages, which are built a short distance’ away from the river bank. About four miles from the mouth of the Louvendji we arrived at the village of Dihaou, the chief town of the Ashira Kambas, where we had to stay in order to obtain proper intro- duction to the Avia tribe, in whose territory were situated the Falls. Cusp. V. DIHAOU AND THE ASHIRA KAMBAS. 95 Dihaou is a cluster of three or four little villages, each containing about fifteen houses. Soon after 1 arrived presents came from the chief: twelve fowls, five bunches of plantains, and a goat. Our welcome was most friendly, and I felt almost sure of attaining the object for which I had come. 5th. We were all glad of rest after the fatigues -of our long march. My men all complained of sore feet. In the evening the chief, Dihaou Okamba, made me a formal visit to receive his return present. I gave him a few articles, and the gift, although I felt it to be an inadequate one, for I had not brought goods with me, seemed to please the old fellow very much. I promised him, however, a big coat, a neck- lace of large beads, and some salt, on my return to Olenda, on condition that he would send one of his sons with me to the Falls. I had forewarned him by message, that I could not make a sufficient return for the goat I heard he intended to give me; but the old man had all the pride and generosity which these African chiefs usually show in dealing with the white man—at least, whilst the friendship is new. He sent back the reply: “I should not like it to be said that Chaillie, the friend of Olenda, Chaillie my ntangani, came to my town, and that I had not a goat to give him to eat; never.” These Ashira Kambas consider themselves a distinct people from the Ashira of the prairie, over which Olenda and other chiefs ruled, and which are called Ashira Ngozai. I could not, however, detect any difference between them worthy of note, either in their physique or customs, and the language of the 96 VISIT TO THE SAMBA NAGOSHI FALLS. Cuap, V two peoples is the same. By immemorial law of the country, the Ashira Ngozai are allowed to trade direct with the Kambas, but they are not permitted to go beyond them in their trading expeditions If an Ashira of the prairie wishes to trade with any tribe north of the Kamba country, he is obliged to employ Kambas as his agents, and must remain in Dihaou until the business is arranged. Otherwise he - is compelled to leave his goods in the hands of some Kamba man, and trust to him in bartering them for produce with other tribes. I believe there was not a single Ashira Ngozai who had ever seen the Samba Nagoshi Falls, so effectual are the political barriers which are opposed to the travels of natives beyond the limits of their own and adjoining tribes. __ We had the usual difficulty in getting away from | Dihaou. The African is never in a hurry to resume a march, and it evratifies the pride of the chief and gives him consequence amongst his neighbours to have the ntangani in his possession. Arangui, nephew of Olenda, who was my chief guide, gave me some trouble with his fears that the villagers wished to bewitch him through jealousy of the white man’s — friendship. I found it necessary, on the 6th of December, to address a speech to the chief and his — subjects, telling them that I must go forward without further delay to the Samba Nagoshi, that I had to sherra mpaga, ““a wager to win,” that our feet had — rested long enough, and, finally, that I must be off the next day. Dihaou and his people, as usual. retired a short distance to deliberate, and returned. the chief saying that it should be as I wished; that Cuap. V. NAVIGATE THE NGOUYAI RIVER. 97 no harm should come to me from the Aviia people, for they were all his friends, several of his sisters were married amongst them, &c., &c. ith. The canoe given me for the voyage was a leaky, rotten affair, and on trial I found that it would not contain all our party, with my instruments and the provisions for the journey. I was obliged to leave three men behind with half the plantains. Even then the wretched vessel was only an inch-and a half above the water. It seemed to me to be running too great a risk to trust my chronometers on such a journey. If the canoe upset we might swim or scramble ashore, saving what we could, but the loss of the watches would put an end to lunar observations, which I felt to be one of the principal objects of my expedition. So I determined to confide them to Dihaou till my return. The three men we left out of the canoe were to go a tedious march by land and meet, us at the Falls. We left the town at a quarter to nine a.m. and entered the great Rembo (the river Ngouyai) at ten -minutes past ten a.m., the distance being about ten miles. It was with some pride that I greeted again this fine river, which I had the honour of discovering on my former journey, at the upper part of its course in the Apingi country ;* up to the present time I was the only white man who had ever embarked on its waters. The Ovigui, at its junction with the Ngouyai, is * «Adventures in Equatorial Africa,’ p. 488. In the Apingi country it is called the Rembo (river) Aping), under which name I described it loc. cit. ' ve ° “ } M4 ‘ E - 98 VISIT TO THE SAMBA NAGOSHI FALLS. Cnap. V about thirty-five yards broad, and is, at this time of the year (the rainy season), a deep stream. The banks are clothed with uninterrupted forest, leaving only little entrances here and there at the ports of the villages, which lie backwards from the river. Silence and monotony reign over the landscape, un- enlivened by the flight and song of birds or the movement of animals. After a few miles’ pull. down the Ngouyai, we arrived at a village of the Aviia tribe, called Mandji. As soon as we stepped ashore, the timid villagers— men, women, and children—set off to run for the forest, and all the shouting of my Ashira Kamba companions was for some time of no avail. We took possession of the empty huts, and the people, after the assurance that we had not come to do them harm. dropped in one by one. Confidence had not quite been restored when a gun fired by my man, Rebouka, on the beach, again put to flight the timid savages. This time one of our Ashiras’ had to follow them into the thicket and coax them to come back. It was the dirtiest village I had yet seen in Africa, and the inhabitants appeared to me of a degraded class of negroes. The shape and arrangement of the village were quite different from anything I had seen ~ before. The place was in the form of a quadrangle, with an open space in the middle not more than ten yards square, and the huts, arranged in a continuous row on two sides, were not more than eight feet high from the ground to the roof. The doors were only four feet high, and of about the same width, with — sticks placed across on thetinside, one above the other, — Pen: AVIIA VILLAGE OF MANDJI. 99 to bar the entrance. The place for the fire was in the middle of the principal room, on each side of which was a little dark chamber, and on the floor was an orala, or stage to smoke meat upon. In the middle of the yard was a hole dug in the ground for the reception of offal, from which a disgusting smell arose, the «wretched inhabitants being too lazy or obtuse to guard against this by covering it with earth. The houses were built of a framework of poles, covered with the bark of trees, and roofed with leaves. In the middle of the village stood the public shed, or palaver-house, a kind of town-hall found in almost all West African villages. A large fire was burning in it, on the ground, and at one end of the shed stood a huge wooden idol, painted red and white, and rudely fashioned in the shape of a woman. The shed was the largest building in the village, for it was ten feet high, and measured fifteen feet by ten. It is the habit of the lazy negroes of these interior villages—at least, the men—to spend almost the whole day lying down under the palaver- shed, feeding their morbid imaginations with tales of - witchcraft, and smoking their condoquais. _ We stayed in this wretched abode of savages only to take our mid-day meal. A little before two p.m. we were again en route. The river scenery was most beautiful; glorious vegetation clothed the banks, and through breaks in the forest we caught frequent glimpses of blue hills beyond. But the number of _ deserted villages we passed imparted. a saddening effect to the landscape. The country seemed de- ” Nay 7) ‘ Z aA, ad ‘ a 100 VISIT TO THE SAMBA NAGOSHI FALLS. Cnar. V populated. No groups of people were seen, happy at their work; no songs of boatmen were heard, paddling their canoes over the pleasant stream. The craven superstitions of these wretched people, and the horror of remaining in any place after a death has occurred, are the eauses which lead to the aban- donment of their dwellings. Where the people of this neighbourhood had gone to I could not ascer- tain. . No wonder that these interior tribes make no advance in industry, wealth, and culture, whilst such customs exist. ete About three miles below the Avua village, we came in sight of the Nkoumou Nabouali peaks, which appeared to extend from N.N.W. to S.S.H. There were four distinct ranges of hills in view from _ this spot, Nkoumou Nabouali, the highest, being the second in point of distance from us. Siar, aL exception of my staunch friend, King Quengueza. . He was overjoyed at the splendour of the presents, but said, “Truly, goods and money are like hunger ; be you are filled to-day, but to-morrow you are hungry * me again!” — | CHAPTER X THE OTANDO AND APONO REGION. Geographical Position of Mayolo—Splendour of the Constellations as seen - from the Equatorial Regions—The Zodiacal, Light—Twinkling of the Stars—Meteoric Showers—The Otando and Apono Plains, or Prairies _ —The Otando People a branch of the Ashira Nation—Their Customs— Filing the Teeth—Tattooing—Native Dogs. From Olenda eastwards, as attentive readers of my former and present narratives will be aware, the — countries I traversed were new ground, not only to ‘myself, but to any European; it is, therefore, neces- ‘sary that I should give such details as I am able, in the course of my journey, about the various portions of the country, their inhabitants and productions. _ Unfortunately, the volume of my journal, which contained the diary of my march from Olenda to ~ Mayolo, and of more than two months of the latter - part of my stay in this place, was lost, with nearly _ the whole of the rest of my property, in my hurried flight from Ashango-land. It was the only volume _ out of five that was missing. It contained the obser- vations which I took for altitudes of the range of highlands separating the Ashira from the Otando districts; and I am, therefore, unable to give a full ‘account of this range, which is an important feature in this part of Africa, as separating, together with ee ae a é these Equatorial nights, for they have left an indelible | | bee _ Ae ei ee OP Ss ee Ae - ee ¥ ry, A gba t 204 THE OTANDO AND APONO REGION. Cuap. X the lower hilly range west of Olenda, the coast-lands from the great interior of the continent. I remember, however, that some part of the country was more than 1,200 feet above the level of the sea, as shown by the aneroids. | The town of Mayolo I determined, by a long series — of observations, to lie in 1° 51 14 S&S. lat., and 11° 0’ 37” KH. long., and 496 feet above jae sea- level. At Mayolo, the sonnneees of the heavens af- forded me a degree of enjoyment difficult to describe. When every one else had gone to sleep, I often stood alone on the prairie, with a gun by my side, watching the stars. I looked at some with fond love, for they had been my guides, and consequently my friends, in the lonely country I travelled; and it was always — with a feeling of sadness that I looked at them for the last time, before they disappeared below the horizon for a few months, and always welcomed them back with a feeling of pleasure which, no doubt, those — who have been in a situation similar to mine can understand. I studied also how high they twinkled, and tried to see how many bright meteors travelled through the sky, until the morning twilight came and reminded me that my work was done, by the then visible world becoming invisible. a I shall always remember the matchless beauty of impression upon my memory. : The period of the year I spent at Mayolo (April | and May) were the months when the atmosphere is the purest, for after the storms the azure of the sky | Cuar. X. SPLENDOUR OF THE CONSTELLATIONS. 205 was so intensely deep, that it made the stars doubly bright in the vault of heaven. + At that time the finest constellations of the Southern Hemisphere were within view at the same time. The constellation of the Ship, of the Cross, of the Centaur, of the Scorpion, and the Belt of Orion, which include the three brightest stars in the heavens, Sirius, Ca- nopus, and a Centauri. The planets Venus, Mars, Saturn, and Jupiter were in sight. The Magellanic Festa caniheloniials patches, especially the larger one—brightly illuminated as they revolved round the starless South Pole, con- trasting with the well-known “ coal-sack” adjoining _the Southern Cross. The part of the Milky Way, between the 50° and 80° parallel, so beautiful and rich in crowded nebule “and stars, seemed to be in a perfect blaze between ‘Sirius and the Centaur; the heavens there appeared brilliantly iuminated. _ Then looking northward, I could see the beautiful constellation of the Great Bear, which was about the same altitude above the horizon as the constellations of the Cross and of the Centaur; some of the stars in the two constellations passing the meridian within a ‘short time of each other; y Urse Majoris half an hour before a Crucis, and Benetnasch eleven minutes before 6 Centauri. __ Where and when could any one have a grander view of the heavens at one glance? From a Urse Majoris to a Crucis, there was an arc of 125°. Then, as if to give a still grander view to the almost en- 206 THE OTANDO AND APONO REGION. Cap. X. chanting scene, the zodiacal light rose after the sun had set, increasing in brilliancy, of a bright yellow colour, and rising in a pyramidal shape high into the sky, often so bright that it overshadowed the brightness of the milky way and the rays of the moon, the beautiful yellow light gradually diminish: ing towards the apex. It cast a gentle radiance on the clouds round it, and sometimes formed almost a ring, but never perfect, having a break near the meridian ; at times being reflected in the east with nearly as much brilliancy, if not as much, as in the west, and making me almost imagine a second sunrise. I had noticed this yellow glow before at Olenda in March, where it was sometimes very bright; but — it was only at Méyolo I began to write down obser- — vations upon it. April and May were the months when the light showed itself in its greatest brilliancy. It often became visible half an hour after the sun had _ disappeared, and was very brilliant, like a second — sunset. It still increased in brilliancy, and attained — often a very bright orange colour at the base. It rose in a very distinct pyramidal shape, which some- times, if I remember well, must have extended about bi 40°, the bright yellow gradually becoming fainter and | fainter at the top. The brilliancy and duration varied a _ considerably on different days, and also the breadth — and height. It could be seen most every day when | the sky was clear; and as it faded away, it left behind ~ it a white light, which also showed itself in the east. — It was generally the brightest from a quarter to seven to half-past seven, but there were exceptions ; sometimes it would be later, and at times the glow a Cuap. X. THE ZODIACAL LIGHT. 207 would fade and then reappear with fresh strength; but generally the increase and decrease of brilliancy was uniform. It was seldom discernible after ten o’clock. Unfortunately the book containing these observa- tions on the light has been lost, but a few notes on it are scattered here and there in my journal. April 13th. The weather has been cloudy, with a few showers. . . . . To-night the sky presents a magnificent appearance after sunset. The glow coming from the west was so bright that it over- _ shadowed the brightness of the Milky Way. I could only distinguish it above the Sword of Orion; the _ glow was the brightest below the planet Mars, and i the base of the pyramid reached, on the south, the : part of the Milky Way at the foot of the Cross, At the north point of the horizon its extent was about the same. | April 15th. The weather has been cloudy until | past noon, and to-night the sky is clear though a little hazy. The glow of light coming from the west >is beautiful, and is quite white; at seven o’clock it was still of great intensity, though it had dimin- ished. I do not remember to have seen it so bright before. ; May 5th. Yesterday the bright yellow light which “appears after sunset was magnificent, and could be seen above the trapezium in Orion notwithstanding the strong moonlight, the moon being then nearly at the full. Indeed, I have never seen the zodiacal. light shine so brightly; one might fancy, if it was not towards the west, the dawn of morning coming. May 14th. After sunset I observed a phenomenon 16 208 THE OTANDO AND APUNO REGION. Cuap. X, that much surprised me; the zodiacal light had its counterpart in the east. Now I will make a few observations on the twinkling of stars. Some persons have believed that, in our northern latitudes, the stars twinkle more than within the tropics. I spent this last summer at Twickenham at Mr. Bishop’s observatory, and have watched the scintillation of the stars, and I doubt much if this conclusion is right; unfortu- nately, I have also lost the notes I had made on this subject. I remember distinctly that one of the stars of the Belt of Orion twinkled until it reached the — zenith; others twinkled to a considerable altitude. There were nights when they seemed to twinkle more than at other times. While watching the stars, in the southern heavens, — it appeared to me that a Centauri was changing to ~ a ruddy colour. It was certainly not so white as B — Centauri, and often, through a light mist so common there, I could recognise it through its reddishness. — I should say, that it was only with the naked eye :) that these observations were made. a The most southern star of the constellation of the q Ship (c Argts), distant from Canopus about 17° 43/, | was quite red to the eyes. j In regard to the April shower of meteors, I only © i saw them few in number; there was nothing to com- — pare with the number of those I observed this year at Twickenham, in company with the distinguished | ; astronomer, Mr. en but many were far ob So Onap. X. PLAINS OR PRAIRIES. 209 emanate from the direction of Leo, though its altitude was very high. All the inquiries I made concerning the fall of aer- olites have been fruitless; the negroes never saw any, though I suppose that, as in every other country, some may have fallen, but they are buried in these impenetrable forests. Mayolo lies on the western edge of an undulating plain about twenty miles broad, stretching between the Ashira ranges of hills and the higher ridges of Ashango in the interior; this plain averaging about 400 feet above the sea-level, and the hilly ranges running nearly north-west and south-east. The plain is covered in many places with a clayey soil, but in other parts with masses of fragments of ferruginous sandstone. It is watered by the Ngouyai and its affluents, which river flows in a north-westerly direction, and, cutting through the hilly range north of Ashira-land, forms a junction some thirty miles further down with the Okanda (apparently a still more important stream); both together then form the great River Ogobai, which pursues a south- westerly direction through the coast-plains to the Atlantic. The plains east of Mayolo are inhabited, as will _ presently be seen, by the Otando .and the Apono tribes. These plains consist chiefly of undulating _grass-land, diversified by groups of trees, or small eircumscribed tracts of forest, in which are many -Mhagnificent timber-trees; the banks of the river are almost everywhere lined with trees for a hundred 210 THE OTANDO AND APONO REGION. Cuap. X. yards or more from the water's edge. Now and then the prairie reaches to the water-side. The grass-lands extend in a north-west and south-east direction, and the numerous negro-villages are gene- rally built in the prairie. Some of the wooded islands or isolated patches of forest are many miles in length ; the prairies are covered with tall grasses and shrubs, without any mixture of bushes or trees. The soil of the forest tracts is generally more fertile than that of the prairies, and it is within their shades that the plantations of the people are situ- ated. The Otando villages round Mayolo are sur- rounded by groves of plaintain-trees; and the broad magnificent leaves of these trees form a striking contrast with the grass that surrounds them. I have little to remark respecting the Otando people. They are a branch of the Ashira nation, speaking the Ashira language, and having a similar © physical conformation to the people of that tribe, — together with the same superstitions, customs, arts, — warlike implements, and dress; but they do not | seem to be so industrious in the manufacture of the | grass cloth. bo I found many of the people not very dark-skinned. | They had various fashions as regards their teeth. — Many file the two upper incisors in the shape of — a sharp cone, and the four lower ones are also | filed to a sharp point. Others file the four upper — incisors to a point. A few among them have the two upper incisors pulled out. They tattoo them- | selves on the chest and stomach, but keep the fa oe | Cap. X. NATIVE DOGS. 211 smooth. Among the young people very few have their teeth filed: the custom is dying out. One day, in my rambles near Mayolo, two of my native dogs had a severe fight with a very large white-nosed monkey (cercopithecus), and came back to me in a dreadful state, especially my dog An- _ deko, who, being always the first in a fray, generally came off worse than his comrade. In this encounter with the white-nosed monkey, he had the flesh of his fore-leg bitten through to the bone, and his upper lip was cut in two by a terrible gash. Andeko was famous for his courage. He had at different times taken alive young gorillas, young chimpanzees, and _ young boars. _ These native dogs are keen, active animals; they are seen in the interior of purer blood than in the - Commi country, where they have become much _ changed by crossing with European dogs of various breeds, brought by trading vessels. The pure bred ~ native dog is small, has long straight ears, long ; muzzle, and long, curly tail—-very curly when the _ breed is pure. The hair is short and the colour _ yellowish, the pure breed being known by the clear- ness of this colour. They are always lean, and are _ kept very short of food by their owners; in fact, they get no food except what they can aa Al- _ though they have a quick ear, I do not think highly of their scent. My head man, Igala, keeps a large Senmber of dogs for hunting at his plantations in the Fernand Vaz. They are good watch-dogs, but are often destroyed by leopards in the night. As I have : : \ / ea F j — als " v4 : 212 THE OTANDO AND APONO REGION. Cuap. X. stated in ‘Equatorial Africa,” hydrophobia is un- known in this part of the continent. I have only now to confirm that statement; it appears, therefore, conclusive that heat is not the cause of this terrible disease. 3 CHAPTER XL ANTS, The White Ants of the Prairies—The Mushroom-hived Termes—lInterior of their Hives—Three classes in each Community: Soldiers, Workers, ~ and Chiefs—Their mode of building—The Tree Ants—Curious structure of their Hives—Their process of constructing them—The Bark Ants— Curious tunnels formed by them—The Forest Ants—Large size of their Shelters or Hives—The stinging Black Ant. Dourine my stay at Mayolo, I occupied a great part of my’ leisure hours in studying the habits of the many different species of white ants (Termites), the ; nests of which are very conspicuous objects in the prairie. The study of these curious creatures was ~ most fascinating, and it was a source of great enjoy- ent to me in the midst of so many cares and anxieties. The ants are of wonderful diversity, F both in form of body, head, and so forth, and in architectural tastes. I began to form a collection 3 of them, putting specimens of the different kinds, in their various stages, in little glass tubes filled with spirits, having brought an assortment of , _ these tubes for the purpose of preserving minute insects. The loss of this collection in my retreat ~ from Mouaou Kombo I felt most keenly, as I had Bipcd the specimens would have explained much that still remains obscure in the history of these curious insects, It prevents me also from giving the proper 214 ANTS. Cuap. XI. scientific names to the different varieties, each of which builds a different kind of nest; the natives have only a general name for all the species. Mushroom-hived Termes.—Let us begin with the species which builds the mushroom-shaped edifice. These singular hives, shaped like gigantic mush- rooms, are scattered by tens of thousands over the Otando prairie. The top is from twelve to eighteen inches in diameter, and the column about five inches ; the total height is from ten inches to fifteen imches. After the grass has been burnt they present a most extraordinary appearance; near Mayolo they are met with almost at every step. They are not all uniformly built, as they appear at a distance, but differ in the roundness or sharpness of their summits. I opened a great number of these, and followed up my researches day after day into the habits of their | inhabitants. These and all similar edifices are built | to protect the white ants against the inclemencies of *| the weather, and against their enemies, which are | very numerous, and include many predaceous kinds of fellow ants. The mushroom-shaped hive is not so firmly built — in the ground but that it can be knocked down by a ~ well-planted kick. It is built of a kind of mortar — after being digested in the stomachs of the ants, When felled, the base of the pillar is found to have ; rested on the ground, leaving a circular hollow, in — the middle of which is a ball of earth full of cells, : which enters the centre of the base of the pillar, and the cells are eagerly defended by a multitude of the WAS) as (Otando Prairie.) NESTS OF MUSHROOM ANTS AND TREE ANTS Cnap. XI. MUSHROOM-HIVED TERMES. 215 soldier class of the ants, which I took to be males, all striving to bite the intruder with their pincer-like jaws. On breaking open the ball—which, when handled, divided itself into three parts—I always found it full of young white ants in different stages of growth, and also of eggs. The young were of a milky-white colour, while the adults were yellowish, with a tinge of grey when the abdomen is full of earth. Besides these young ants, there were a great many full-grown individuals, whom I took to be females, and who appeared to be the workers or labourers described by entomologists. These have not elongated nippers like the soldiers, but have very bulky abdomens, and they are inoffensive. We shall see presently what their distended abdomens are used for. Besides these soldiers and workers, I always _ saw, whenever I broke a hive, a very much larger specimen than the other two, which came in from _ the inner galleries, looked round, and went away again. These large ants were very few in number. There were, therefore, three distinct sets of indi- viduals. To these large ones I shall give the name of head men or chiefs. In order to examine the rest of the structure I often took an axe and broke the nest into several Pieces ; but the material was so hard that it required several blows before I succeeded. I tried then to make out the structure of the chambers and galleries of which the interior was composed. But before I could do this, I was somewhat perplexed at dis- Covering that there was another distinct species of white ant mixed up with the proper architects of the a ANTS. Caar. kis edifice. The soldiers of this other species were much smaller and more slender, and, as I broke the pieces, these two kinds fell to fighting one another.. On close inspection I found that these slender fellows came out of cells composed of a yellow earth, whilst the others inhabited cells of black earth. The yellow colour was due to a coating of some foreign substance on the walls of the cell. The chambers inhabited by the slender species did not communicate with those peopled by the lords of the manor; they seemed — rather to be inserted into the vacant spaces or par- _ tition walls between the other cells. No doubt they had intruded themselves, after the building had been finished, from under the ground. In the fight the larger kind showed no mercy to the smaller. It was quite marvellous to witness the fury with which the soldiers of the one kind seized the bodies of the others with their powerful pincer-jaws, and carried them — away into their own chambers. The soldiers of the slender kind also possessed long pincer-like jaws, and I noticed in one instance, when a worker of the larger — kind had seized a small worker, who was in her last — struggle for life, that one of these slender soldiers flew — to the rescue, and snapping into the soft abdomen of — the assailant, twice its size, let out its contents; the — slender one then fell from the pincers that had ; gripped her, but life was extinct. The rescuer came, — examined the body, and seeing that she was dead, — went away and disappeared; if she had been only © wounded she would probably have been carried away, as they do the young. I may here remark that, with the exception of the head, the body of the ter- _ Cuap. XI. MUSHROOM NESTS.. 217 mites is exceedingly soft. On examining the struc- ture of the soldiers, it is evident that their powerful pincer-jaws are made for wounding and piercing, while the structure of the workers shows that their pincers are made for the purposes of labour. Nothing astonished me more than this impetuous attack ; my attention was intense on this deadly combat; the weaker species knew the vulnerable point of his for- midable enemy, who was too busy to protect himself. A further examination showed me that the mush- room-like cap of the whole edifice was composed of both black and yellow cells. This curious mixture of two species, each building its own cells and yet contributing to form an entire and symmetrical Bedific, filled me with astonishment. The wonder did “not cease here, for in some of the mushroom-like heads there was still a third kind quite distinct from the other two, and not a white ant. - The mushroom nests are built very rapidly, but when finished they last, in all probability, many eats. The ants work at them only at night, and - shut out all the apertures from the external air when daylight comes, for the white ant abhors daylight; = when they migrate from an old building -to ‘commence the erection of a new one, they come from under the ground. Sometimes they add to their structures by building one mushroom-head above another ; I have seen as many as four, one on the top of the iothew! The new structures are built when the colony increases; new cells must be found for the new comers. The shelter is quite rain-proof. Ps I passed hours in watching the tiny builders at ye 218 ANTS. Cuar. XI their daily labours in the cells, which I was enabled ~ to do by laying open some of their cells, and then observing what went on after all was quiet. So soon as the cells are broken, a few head men or chiefs are seen; each one moves his head all round the aperture, and then disappears into the dark galleries, appa- rently without leaving anything. Then the soldiers — come; these do no work, but there must be some — intention in these movements; they no doubt were © on guard to protect the workers. I was never able, — even with my magnifying glass, to see them do any- thing. The workers then come forward, and each of them turns round and ejects from behind a-quantity — of liquid mud into the aperture, and finally walls it © up. They come one after the other, and all of — them leave their contributions; this is done first ~ in a row from one end of the aperture to another, - | then each ejection is put on the top of the other with a precision that would do honour to a brick- layer or stonemason. The question to me was to- know if the same ants went away to eat more ~ earth and came again. How much would I have | given to be able to see into the dark recesses of the | chambers! but I do not see how this will ever be done. The apertures of the cells were only closed | during the day, and during the following night the | part of the structure which I had demolished was | rebuilt to its original shape. Some of them brought — very small grains of sand or minute pebbles, and — deposited them in the mud; when demolishing their shelter, I saw several cells filled with these little pebbles, which I had also collected and preserved. | Cap. Xl. MODE OF BUILDING. 219 Soon after others came and closed up the celly The earth which they eat can be seen shining through the thin skins of their bodies, but I was unable to see where it was stored in the interior of the edifice. The mud is mixed with gluey matter, through the digestion, when it is ejected, and with this material the little creatures are enabled to build up the thin tough walls which form their cells, and, in course of time, the firm and solid structure of the entire nest. Sun and rain are equally fatal to the white ants; thus it is necessary that they should build a hive ‘impervious to light, heat, and rain. I have put white ants in the sun, and they were shortly after- wards killed by its heat. I thought each cell was, perhaps, inhabited only by one ant, but the great “number I saw in each mushroom-like edifice made it “quite improbable that it should be so. I believe these white ants of the prairie are quite a different species from those which live in subterranean dwellings, and which make their appearance suddenly through the floor of one’s hut and devour all sub- stances made of cotton or paper; these are very fond of eating wood, and are often found in dead trees, ‘In these species, the sense of smell, or some other “sense equivalent to it, must be very acute. One may ‘retire to bed in fancied security, with no sign of white ants about, and in the morning wake to find little covered ways overspreading the floor and chests “of clothing and stores, and the contents of the chest entirely destroyed, with thousands of the busy ants engaged in cutting the things with their sharp jaw- blades. Everything made of wool or silk is, how- 220 ANTS. Cuap. XI. ever, invariably spared. At Méyolo this kind of ant was very abundant, and was a cause of much anxiety to me. Tree Ant.—Now that I have tried to the best of my abilities to give an account of what I call the mushroom-building white ant, I will speak of another species which lives in the forest, and which is often a near neighbour of the other. In the forest there is a.species which makes its hives or nests between the ribs of the trunks of trees. The nests are from four to seven feet long, and six to eight inches broad, and are formed externally of several slanting roofs, one above the other. The ants that make these struc- tures have long black bodies and white heads, and are unlike the mushroom-building ants. The structure begins from the ground in a some- what irregular cylindrical piece of walling or build- — ing about a foot high, but varying to as much as — eighteen inches, and full of cells and galleries; then occurs the first slanting roof. The larger the strue- ture, the more of these slanting roof-like projections it possesses, and they become smaller towards the | top, the middle roof being the broadest; sometimes a few inches will separate one roof from the other; — the roofs communicate with each other through the | cells by the same cylindrical piece of masonry; the | material of which the whole is built is very thick, | hard, and impermeable to rain. The structure of | this ant is not common in the forest; but having — go far to study them. Cuap. XI. THE TREE ANT. 22) I frequently broke open portions of this singular structure, and tried to observe the movements of the inhabitants in the interior of their dark chambers. As in the mushroom hives of the prairie, I found numbers of little pale young ants in the cells; there were also a few head men or chiefs, soldiers, and workers, the soldiers doing no work, whilst the workers were full of activity ; the immature indivi- duals moved but slowly, and seemed very delicate ; the very young ones did not move at all.. Whenever _I broke into the cells, the first care of the adults was always to place the young progeny out of danger; this they did by taking them up in their mouths and carrying them into the inner chambers. Those, how- _ ever, who could walk unaided were driven in. As soon as the young ones had been taken into the cells, the soldiers came to the apertures of all the cells that had been broken, to defend the breach from any enemies that might come: and then the workers began to work with great rapidity. In breaking _ the structure I killed a few of the young ones—the : adults came to them, and seeing them dead, left them on the field. _I observed the soldiers engaged in an occupation Sic was at first incomprehensible to me, but I after- wards came to the conclusion that it was the act of _ tracing with their mouths the outline of the work of "closing up the cells, which was to be completed by _ their fellow ants the workers. The soldiers came and _ stood at the opening of every broken cell in a row, ‘Squet for a little while, then they disappeared. By ; the omen of their heads I thought they might be | 1 222 ANTS. Cua. XL taking some earth away, but I was not able to see this with my magnifying glass. I thought also that. they might be throwing some moisture in order to dampen the soil where the walls were to be built, — there again my magnifying glass failed me. The worker ants would then come in and apply their — mouths intently to the bottom of the cells in the places where the mud had been ejected by the others, and this was done so frequently that it appeared a regular occurrence. It was interesting to watch the regularity with which the ants worked, in compact rows, side by side, until the chambers were covered in. Before building, they carried away the little © pieces of clay which had been broken off, and which — were in their way. The material they used for © building seemed to me almost the same as that of the mushroom-building ants. After having disposed of | their loads, the ants disappeared, and others took — their places; what I wanted to find out was whether — the same ants came again, but, as in the case of the mushroom-building ants, I was not able to settle this | point. The head men were far less numerous in pro- — portion to the total population of the community than in the mushroom hives. The ants of this — species only once rebuilt their hive in its original — shape, after I had broken it. When I again de- stroyed part of it they only closed the open cells. In this kind of building the slanting roof pre- _ vented the rain from getting in; but in the mush room hives, if the damage had not been entirely — repaired, the rain would have penetrated the strue-— ture. i Ounap. XI. THE BARK ANT. 223 Bark Ant.—Another much smaller species of white ant is found under pieces of loose dry bark on the forest trees, on which they feed. The colonies were composed of a very scanty number of individuals, and the ants were so small and obscure that it was not easy to detect them. They always choose trees that are old and have these scales of loose bark on their trunks from place to place. It is under these small patches or scales that the ants live. They feed on the wood, and build covered ways, or rather tunnels, iaihdch start from the ground and communi- eate to the different places where the colony has scattered ‘itself. Now and then, scraping under the bark, I found that the settlement had moved some- _ where else as soon as they had come to the green of the tree. The material which this ant uses to build » _ its tunnels is not earth, but wood-dust. This proves clearly that these white ants, with, perhaps, the ex- 46 ption of one species, build their nests of the same material as they eat, but not till after it has passed through their stomachs, and received an admixture 3 of glutinous fluid. The quantity thrown by this— little species was so minute that I could hardly have ‘ seen it with the naked eye. They worked exactly like the others I have just described. I was unable _ to recognise the three distinct classes of individuals. There seemed to be only two sets—soldiers and _ workers. They worked very slowly when joining the broken portions of the tunnels I had demolished. This was accounted for by the extreme smallness of the particles of material ejected by them, and also by the fact that, in consequence of the tunnel being + t 4 a 224 ANTS. Cap. XI. very narrow, only one or two ai could work at the same time. « 1 i $ 3 ‘a } Forest Termes.—Now I come to another species of white ants much larger than those I have described before, and building far larger structures. } The shelters of this ant are found in the forest, and _ are rather uncommon ; they are always found single, _ their light yellow colour makes them: quite con- — spicuous in the midst of the dark foliage by which they are surrounded ; this yellow colour comes from | the soil which the ants use in building, and which they get from below the black loam. .. : The height of the structure I examined was four feet and a half, and the diameter at the broadest part two feet and a half; after breaking one sinuo- sity I found the cells to be about one inch and a half in length and about half an inch in height, — each cell corresponding with the others by corridors or round tunnels varying from half an inch to one | inch in length, and about a quarter of an inch in | diameter. P| In demolishing the sides, I found that the thickness _ of the wall was only one inch before the cells were | found ; but I found the earth at the top much hacdel | much larger quantity of glutinous matter in this part of the structure. . After aaa three inches of this a to g NEST OF FOREST ANTS Ay | Cuap. XI. FOREST TERMES. ) 225 to remain there alone, but for what reason they re- quired to remain alone I was unable to discover ; at that time there were no ants there. Then with the axe I gave a powerful blow, and - demolished another part of the structure, which dis- turbed the ants from their dark chambers. I saw there the three different classes of ants: the head men, very large, with whitish body and black head _ (these were but few in number); the workers, with short and thick body and broad head, but not so large as the chiefs; and, thirdly, the soldiers, not so large as the workers, more slender, and possessing longer nippers. These three distinct classes were the inhabitants of this curious structure. | _ As Iwas looking at these ants, my attention was suddenly called to watch their movements. The sol- ‘diers came and, ranging themselves round the broken eells, took their stand and remained immovable. Benen the workers came; each carried between its ‘pinchers a small particle of yellow clay, which some of them collected from the broken pieces, and which stood in my sight, while others came with their loads from the cells; there were sometimes two or three | busy together at the same time and in the same cells. Each ant came and put down its particle of wet clay with the utmost precision, and then with its head moved it right and left, and by so doing succeeded in making the bits stick together, and so finished the wall. Each bit was put by the side of the one left y the previous werker, who had gone to fetch more, for here I saw the same ant go and fetch fresh pieces of the same clay, which came from the structure I i ae ee Ss 226 ANTS. Onap. XI. had broken. I observed that they never went out- side the cells to get their materials. No masons could have worked more systematically. But how could the clay which I saw them take dry become suddenly wet? I took a small reed and ad- vanced it quietly towards some; they made a spring at it (for these ants’ bites are far worse than the others) and seized it with their nippers, and then threw upon © it a little whitish thickish matter, the same stuff that — made the clay wet and ready for building purposes, — During the working time not one of the largest — class was in sight. The soldiers kept watch, and it was only just before the wall was closed that they retired. 3 ~ As in the other species, only a single class out of — the three worked. This ant is not the Termes belli- cosus of Smeathman; which erects far larger build- _ ings, and is rather well known on the coast of Africa. It has been described by several travellers; but I have never met with a single specimen. M. — Serval, in his ‘Exploration of the Ogobai,’ mentions — having seen an ant-hive four metres high. This — would correspond with the height of the sheltered hives built by the Termes bellicosus. In them Smeathman found only labourers and _ soldiers— fighting ants, as he calls them. Smeathman gives” a most graphic and interesting account of this species. From his account it would appear that the Termes bellicosus builds the sheltered hives in the same way as the forest ants do. Professor Owen kindly lent me Smeathman’s paper, which was published in 1781. oe Pte a Ouap. XI. THE MOGOKORA ANT. 227 I have never been able to find a single winged specimen of any white ants whatever, but I found unwinged queens in the mushroom hives. The Mogékora Ant.—Often, while I was walking in the Otando prairie, another ant attracted my attention ; it was called by the natives Mégékora; itis a ground ant. Many hours I have spent in studying its habits. These ants are of a black colour; many of them are an inch in length, and they are the largest species of ants Imet with. They possess long and powerful nippers, and; when once they have seized an insect, they never _ relinquish their hold; and they have often to struggle very hard before overpowering their victim. Con- sidering the large size of the insects which I have seen them master, I judge that their strength must be enormous. They wander solitarily over the prairie, _ and it was only after the grass had been burnt, that _ Fcould study them thoroughly. They seem to scour it in search of prey; insects and caterpillars being their food. They inhabit holes or subterranean cham- _ bers, and seem never to move very far from their _ abodes; as soon as they have captured an insect they make for their galleries, and enter them with their victim, which they devour at leisure. I never _ saw them eat their prey out of their dens. These holes or subterranean chambers are scattered over * the prairie, and each ant seems to know the one that belongs to it. When they find an individual of _ their own species dead, they carry it off to their den. These dens are found almost always on the decli- “vity of hills, so that the water may not enter them 228 ANTS, Cuap. Xl, so easily when it rains; in despite of this, many are found drowned after a heavy storm, so that the spe- cies is not very abundant; besides, the burning of the prairie must also destroy many. Their bite is very painful, and is felt for a.long time afterwards. When trodden upon they emit a strong smell, I have never been able to find out the nest of these ants, and have never seen a winged one. The Ozhom Ant.—This is a much smaller species than the Mégékora; it is found in the prairie and on the borders of the forest. Like the former it is essentially a ground ant. It seems more voracious than its powerful neighbour, for they capture their own species alive and devour them. I have often assisted at these fights. The attacking party is sure — always to be larger than the attacked, which, though — much weaker, offers great resistance, knowing what — will be its fate if it cannot escape. The ants wrestled | together, and sometimes the attacked succeeded in ~ escaping, but generally they are recaptured. | If one of the ants is not strong enough to over- | power its victim or drag it along, then two or three _ will unite to help it. j The sting of this species reminded me “ala of | the sting of a bee, and I have myself suffered in- My tensely from it—once for more than two hours, in | despite of the ammonia which I applied to the sting. | The Stinging Black Ant.—I have only noticed this species in the Otando country; it is very scarce and q only found in the forest, climbing along trunks of — THE STINGING BLACK ANT. 229 . am s. These ants are almost as large as the Mdégo- , and they are also of a dark black colour, and d more like a bee than any other ant I have | Their sting is quite of the size of that of a a very difficult to capture if they have once been missed. Their sting is the most painful I ever felt ut happily the pain does not last long. CHAPTER XIL MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. . Leave Mayolo—Cross the Nomba Obana Hill—River Dooya—Arrival at Mouendi—Timidity of the Inhabitants—The Chief Nchiengain—Arrival of Apingi Men—Loss and Recovery of a Thermometer—Nocturnal Reflections—African Story of the Sun and Moon—Smelling the White Man’s Presents—Passage of the Ngouyai—Hippopotami and Crocodiles ; seasons of their scarcity and abundance—Arrival at Dilolo—Opposition of the Inhabitants to our entering the Village—Pluck of my Commi Boys—Arrival at Mokaba—-My system of a Medicine Parade for my Men. - Our preparations being finished, we left Mdyolo on the 30th of May, at half-past eight in the morning. The good chief accompanied us, and our party con- sisted of about thirty men, including twenty porters, all heavily laden with my baggage. My own load was, besides a double-barrelled gun and two revol-— vers, fifty ball cartridges, thirty bullets, six pounds of shot, and a quantity of powder and caps; alto- gether about forty pounds weight. a, The whole of the villagers came to bid me - good | bye—the women were especially demonstrative in | their adieux. I gave them a parting present of | beads. As we left the village, they all shouted, “The Oguizi is going! the Oguizi is going! we shall — never see him more!” It was with a heavy heart that I bade adieu to these good-natured people. For three hours we followed a course nearly due | Cuap. X11. RIVER DOOYA. 231 east over the open grass-land of Otando. About _ seven miles from Mayolo we ascended a high hill, _ part of an elevated ridge, called Nomba Obana; from its summit a beautiful view is obtained towards the 1 west, as far as the dividing range between Otando and Ashira; on the eastern side an equally exten- sive prospect opens out towards the higher ranges, amongst which dwell the Ishogo, the Ashango, and _ other tribes; but directly east there was a gap in _ the range, e north and south the mountains were higher. The continuous forest which clothed the hills, green on the nearer ranges and shading off to “misty blue on the distant ones, gave an air of solitude to the scene. The eastern slope of Nomba Obana “was precipitous, and red sandstone rocks lay about in wild confusion.. In the valley were the ruins of a village that had ‘been abandoned by Mayolo. This was the second -yillage he had abandoned within less than two years. Hi any one dies, Mayolo immediately moves off, say- ing that the place is bewitched. _ About three miles east of Nomba Obana we crossed small river called Dooya. It was. fordable at this . season, but during the rains it must be a considerable : 4 eam. Marching onwards, always in an easterly | “direction, we arrived, at half-past four, at the vil- lage of the Apono chief Nchiengain, which is called M Mouendi. The territory of the Apono tribe lies chiefly to the south-east of this place. * We halted before entering the village, at the re- qu est of Mayolo, to arrange the order of going in, for _ it was necessary to avoid anything that might give 232 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Cuap. XII. alarm to the timid savages, who had never before received a similar visitor. The passage of inhabited places would henceforward be the most difficult part of our journey; as long as we had nothing but forests, rivers, and mountains to traverse, provided we could get plenty of food, all would go well; but to — contend with the superstitious fears, restless curiosity, and greedy avarice of the chiefs and villagers was a serious matter. It was settled that Mayolo, who was the friend and nkaga (born the same day) of Nchien- — gain, should go first, and that the rest should follow — at intervals one by one. We marched towards the — entrance of the village in dead silence. As we approached, the people who first caught sight of us, began to flee. The women cried out as_ they ran with their babes in their arms, “ The Oguizi! ~ (Spirit) the Oguizi! He has come and we shall die!” They wept and shrieked ; I heard their cries” with dismay, but did not know till afterwards that the small-pox had already swept through this village. When we reached the middle of the village, there | was not a soul remaining except Nechiengain himself and two men, who stood with fear depicted in their countenances near the ouandja (a kind of house open — in front) of the chief. Nchiengain, however, had given his consent to our coming, and seemed to have inwardly resolved to brave it out. He had fortified himself against evil by besmearing his body witi - great streaks of the alumbi chalk, and hanging his fetiches around him. The persuasive tongue of Mayolo soon calmed fears. He gathered courage to look me steadii | | er 4 *| his | 4iN0 i t hs as xi. (CC CHIEF NCHIENGAIN. 233 the face. I then addressed him in the Ashira lan- guage, and recounted the treasures in beads, caps for the head, coats, and cotton prints that I had brought for him; finally he began to smile and took my proffered hand. Beads were promised to the women, and gradually the people came back to their houses. Mayolo finished up with a lengthy speech in the African manner, proving to him that I did not bring the plague. Towards evening I went round the _ village, looked into the huts, laughed with the people, and distributed beads. Good humour was restored, and the remark became general that the Oguizi was -a good Spirit after all. i I took meridian altitudes of Arcturus and a Crucis = fy before retiring to bed, although exceedingly fatigued after our long march and the great load I had carried. ‘I found, by these observations, that my course had been due east. _ 31st May. Nchiengain is a tall, slender old negro, _ with a mild and timid expression of features. He is the leading chief of the Apono tribe in these parts ; - bat his clan is now, I hear, almost extinguished. His "village i is one of the finest and cleanest I have yet seen, the houses being neat, built chiefly of bamboo, or st bs of the leaf-stalks of palm-trees, and ered in ‘symmetrical lines. I have measured the street, and find it to be 447 yards long and 18 broad. The houses are small and quite separate from one another ; the height of the roof is about seven feet; and ith ho i se Fis its little verandah in front, under which the inhabitants take their meals and sit to smoke and chat. The soil on which the village stands is 234 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Ouap. XII. clayey. I notice that many of the men have their two middle upper incisor teeth pulled out, and the two next to them filed to a pomt. Some of the women beautify themselves in a similar way; they — also endeavour to improve their looks by tattooing — themselves in long scars on their foreheads, between — their eyebrows, and on their cheeks in a line with © the middle of the ear. The people of Nchiengain’s village are all Bam: bais or Bambas—that is, the children of slaves, born in the country. The women are the prettiest I have seen in Africa; and many of them had_ very small feet and hands, which I have remarked is the case with many of the negroes of ac Africa. Although the chief seems to be of a good disposition, I found him no better inclined to forward my journey than any of the others I had had dealings with, Like the Olenda people, he wanted the chief who | had brought me to his place to leave me in his hands ; this being the first step necessary to enable — the rapacious negroes to get all they could out of me at their leisure. Mayolo was firm in his demand to have me forwarded across the Rembo in two days, and I supported his arguments by feigning anger at the chief’s proposal, and refusing | to eat the presents of food he had made me. Our | palavers lasted all this day and the next. I gave him | a quantity of goods, but, as was to be expected, he | expressed his dissatisfaction, with a view to get more out of me. I left Mdyolo with him, and by some means or other he persuaded him to be conten ed. CHap. XII. ARRIVAL OF APINGI MEN. 235 What could I do with a man who believed that I made all these things myself, by some conjuring process ? for it is thus that Nchiengain argued with Mayolo: “The cloth and beads and guns cost him no trouble to make; why does he not give me more of these things which do me so much good?” “ Mayolo,” he would continue in course of his many palavers with him, “‘ you eat me with jealousy. Why do you want yourself to take the Oguizi to the Ashango country? why not go back and leave him to me? I want it to _ go far and wide that the Oguizi and Nchiengain are big friends.” At length he offered himself to accom- “pany me across the Rembo, and to give me some ' porters, for our loads were too heavy for our present numbers. It was the passage of this river (the upper Ngouyai) that offered our next difficulty ; it was too _ wide and deep to ford or swim across, and we needed 4 good canoe to ferry the party over. ~ June 1st. A number of Apingi men came up the Ri: to- day from their villages, which are situated a a few miles lower down, on the river banks, to- wards the north or north-west, but belonging to : different clan from Remandji’s, which I visited a my former journey. They fraternised with the fe Apono, and we had great noise, tam-tamming, and [' confusion. They brought about 100 bunches of ae for sale, which my men purchased. I find the Apingi are generally lighter and redder in colour - than the Apono, and they are not so well-made a | People or so handsome (or less ugly) in features. But re are no sharp lines of distinction between these | African oe They intermarry a good deal with 236 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Cnap. XII each other, and, besides, the chiefs have children with their slaves who are brought from various tribes, far and near. The Apingi were not so much accustomed — to me as the Apono were, and whenever they caught ~ sight of me they fled. The noise made by these fellows was quite unbearable. I took a walk into the neighbouring woods; and ~ on my return, going to look at the thermometer hung ~ under the verandah of my-hut, I found it had been stolen. This was too much to be borne, as it was the © only thermometer remaining to me after the plun- — dering of the Ashira. I felt that I must use energetic — measures to recover the instrument, so I seized two men ~ who were running away from the heap of plantains — in front of my hut, and calling on my Commi boys to eock their guns, I sent for Nchiengain and said that I would shoot a man if the instrument was not re- turned ‘to me. Nchiengain and the Apono declared that the Apingi were the thieves. Two chiefs who were with the Apingi protested that the theft was committed by none of their men, that they did not come to steal, &c., &c. My strong measures, how- | ever, had the desired effect ; the thermometer, for- | ‘tunately unbroken, was found shortly after lying on” the ground near a neighbouring hut. Many of the | Apingi were armed with spears, but they are not 50 | warlike as the Apono. ee are more _scoustornall to the Ren, E | June 1st. I paid the new Apono porters to-day q We were obliged to have seven more men than before, as the loads were so heavy that the form er Onap, XII. NOCTURNAL REFLECTIONS. 237 number was insufficient, and three of my people had the skin worn off their backs on the march from Mayolo. To-night the air was colder than I ever recollect to have found it in Western Africa. The sky was cloudless but hazy—as, indeed, it often is in the interior, in the clearest weather during the dry season—a reddish halo surrounded the moon. I sat up as usual to take lunar distances and altitudes of stars. Indeed, I seldom retire before one a.m., and enjoy the silent nights, when the hubbub and torment of a crowd of whimsical, restless savages are stilled by sleep. I sometimes stretched myself on _ the ground after the work was done, and enjoyed : the contemplation of the starry heavens, thinking of _ the far-off northern land, lying under ecdbtallieens _. so different from these of the southern hemisphere. _ My thoughts would wander to my distant friends in Europe and North America, and my eyes would fl with tears when I dwelt on the many acts of _ kindness I had received from them. Did they now Othink of the poor lonely traveller working out his Mission amidst savages in the heart of Africa ! _ I was not always so solitary in taking my nightly bevations, for sometimes one or other of my men | or Mayolo would stand by me. Of course I could _ never make them comprehend what I was doing. | Sometimes I used to be amused by their ideas about the heavenly bodies. Like all other remarkable ~ natural objects, they are the subjects of whimsical myths amongst them. According to them, the sun moon are of the same age, but the sun brings daylight and gladness and the moon brings darkness, 238 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Cuap. XII. * witchcraft and death—for death comes from sleep, and sleep commences in darkness. The sun and moon, _ they say, once got angry with each other, each one 3 claiming to be the eldest. The moon said: “ Who are you, to dare to speak to me? you are alone, you ~ have no people; what, are you to consider yourselt equal to me? Look at me,’ she continued, showing the stars shining around her, “ these are my people ; I am not alone in the world like you.” The sun answered, “Oh, moon, you bring witchcraft, and it is — you who have killed all my people, or I should have — as many attendants as. you.” According to the ne- — groes, people are more. liable to die when the moon first makes her appearance and when she is last visible. They say that she calls the people her in- sects, and devours them. The moon with them is the emblem of time and of death. | _ I was much amused to-day. Some of the inha-— bitants of a neighbouring Apono village, who had been most hostile to my coming to their country, | having since heard that I had brought no evil or | sickness with me here, now came to see me. As soon | as my friend Nchiengain saw them, he went up to them in great anger, crying out, “Go away, go away! Now that you have smelt niva (my goods or presents), you are no longer afraid, but want to come!” So the men went away without my speakin o to them. t June 2nd. Towards evening both Nchiengain-and | Mayolo got drunk with palm wine, and their ardour | to go forward with me was something astonishing. They say they are going with me far beyond the a a § . ] . Cuap. XII. AN APONO IDOL. 239 Ashango; they are men; they will even travel by night, as there will be the moon with us. I wanted to obtain one of the idols of the Apono, so to-day, on asking Nchiengain, he took me out of the village along a path which led to a grove of trees, and thence he sent his head wife to a mbuiri house to fetch an idol. When it came, I found it so large (it was, in fact,a load for one man) and so disgustingly indecent, that I was obliged to refuse it. _ Tfelt that if I accepted it I should be like the worthy - mayor in the well-known story, who received the present of a white elephant. Like other idols which _ Thad seen, it was a female. | - . The villagers have the largest ngoma, or tam-tam, _ [have ever seen. It measures very nearly nine feet in length, and the hollowing of the log must have cost the Apono a great deal of labour. Many of the people are drunk to-night, following the example of _ the two chiefs. I had always heard from the slaves near the coast that the Apono were a merry race, and I now find it so with a vengeance. Since my arrival here there has been nothing but dancing and singing every night. I distributed beads among the | women, and this has hada great effect. So we are et all good friends together. | —s- Sune 3rd. We left. Mouendi with a gent deal of gt trouble this morning. Nchiengain and Mayolo _ wanted to renew the libations of the previous even- ‘ing, and, in fact, were half-drunk soon after daylight ; but I went to the hut where the symposium was going on, and, kicking over the calabashes of palm Ww ine, sent the chiefs and their attendants to the < 240 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Crap. XIL right-about. I could.not, however, get Nchiengain away, and we started without him. I wondered afterwards at the good-nature of these people, who saw with composure a stranger knocking over so large a quantity of their cherished beverage. They did not resent my act, but only grumbled that so much ‘good liquor was spilt instead of going down their throats. We reached the banks of the river, distant about three miles from the village, at two p.m. The Ngouyai was here a fine stream, nearly as wide as the Thames at London Bridge, and from ten to fifteen _ feet deep, flowing from the S.8.W. q It was now the dry season, when the water is about ten feet below the level of the rainy season. — The yellow waters formed a curious contrast to the i dark green vegetation of its banks. I could not but — admire the magnificent trees which towered above — the masses of lower trees and bushes growing from — the rich soil; some of them grew on the very brink — of the stream, and their trunks were supported by — erect roots, looking like May-poles, eight or ten feet high, and projecting in places over the water. Open- | ings in the wall of foliage revealed to us the interior of the jungle, where the trees were interlaced with | creepers of all kinds, especially the india-rubber vine, which is here very abundant. ny I was surprised to find Nchiengain’s flat-bottoned At canoe, or ferry-boat, large and well-made. It carried — | my party and baeienee across in seven journeys. — We finished at half-past four p.m., and encamped | for the night on the opposite side. Nehiengain : | Cnap. XII. HIPPOPOTAMI AND CROCODILES. 241 _arrived at the river-side, reeling drunk, just as we were shoving off with the last load, and I told the men to pretend not to hear his shouts for the return of the canoe to embark him, so he had to come over alone when we had all landed on the other side. _ I was struck with the scarcity of animal life on and near the river. But the rich and open valley through which it flows must teem with Natural History wealth in its varied woods; we could not expect to see much amid the noise of our crossing, and in the short time we remained in the district. There were no aquatic birds in sight, not even pelicans. The water was too deep and there were too few sand and mud banks for hippopotami; for I have always noticed that these animals are found only in rivers which abound in shallows. If the rivers have shallows in _ the dry season only, then hippopotami are to be seen there only in the dry season. It is the same with crocodiles. In the seasons of flood one may travel for weeks without seeing a single individual of either _ Species in rivers and lakes which nevertheless swarm with them in the dry season. Thus it is with the _ lake Anengue of the Ogobai, which I described in my former work as full of crocodiles, although when _ Messrs. Serval and Griffon Du Bellay visited it, after _ te, in 1862, they were unable to see any of these reptiles. Indeed, I myself found none on my first _ visit to the lake, as related in ‘ Adventures in Hqua- torial Africa ;’ on my second visit I was surprised to find them so abundant. Even a month or a fort- ‘night makes a great difference, and one wonders where all the crocodiles come from. It is well known 242 - MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Cuap. XII. to travellers that fishes are very scarce in seasons of flood, and abundant in the dry season, in the same rivers. The scarcity and abundance, of course, are only apparent; the total population of the water must remain pretty nearly the same all the year round, but we are apt to lose sight of the fact that the area of the waters of any river with many arms and lakes must be immensely greater in the flood season than in the dry, and thus the population is more scattered and hidden from view. - Ath, We left the banks of the river at a quarter- past six am. Shortly afterwards we passed through — an Apono village, and at half-past eight a.m. came to — three Ishogo villages close together. All three pro- — bably belonged to the same clan, and they contained — a considerable population. It was no new feature to — find a settlement of a tribe living in the middle of a © district belonging to another tribe. The Ishogos © had been driven by war from their own territory, — and have thus intruded on unoccupied lands within ~ the territory of their neighbours. 7 The Ishogos of these villages knew that. I was ud . pass through the places. They had heard of the untold wealth I brought with me, and were annoyed when they perceived my intention to pass on without — stopping. The villages are built in an open grassy space; and as soon as the caravan came in sight the — excitement was intense. Women, children, and | armed men came around, shouting and entreating; — some running along the line of march, with goats in — tow, offering them as presents if I would stay with | them, even if it was only for a night. It is the | + J ‘ ¥ 5 ‘“y \ Cap. XII. ISHOGO VILLAGES. 243 custom in all these villages to offer a present of food to a stranger if the inhabitants wish him to stay with them; and the acceptance of the present by the stranger is a token of his intention to remain in the place for a time. They offered also ivory, and slaves, and the more I refused the offers, the more pertina- cious they became. Their sole wish, of course, in asking me to stay, was to get as much as they could of the coveted goods I brought with me. It was droll to see, when I stopped in my walk, how they fled_in alarm to a distance, and then stood still to gaze at me. Two of the chiefs followed us for miles, with their proffered present of a goat each Berotting along by their sides. They finally gave in and went back, saying to Mayolo and Nehiengain that it was their fault that I did not stop. Our -Apono companions mourned over the goats that I might have had: they thought only of their share of the meat, as the animals, when killed, would have _ been cut up and distributed amongst ear ey About mid-day we halted in a beautiful wooded hollow, through which ran a picturesque rivulet. i ‘There we stopped about an hour and breakfasted. _ The direct easterly path from here led to a number of Apono villages; these we wished to avoid in ( order to escape a similar annoyance to that which we _ had undergone in the morning from the Ishogos, and _ so struck a little more southerly, or $.S.H. by compass. Our road lay for three hours over undulating prairie Uk nd, with occasional woods; one of the open spaces “was a prairie called Matimbié irimba (the prairie of oes stretching S.E. and N.W. = : ’ ee ‘ = a on a 244 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Crap. XII. At the §.E. end of the prairie we came to a village called Dilolo. Our reception here was anything but friendly. We found the entrance to the one street of the village barricaded and guarded by all the fighting men, armed with spears, bows and arrows, and sabres. When within earshot, they vented bitter curses © against Nchiengain for wanting to bring the Oguizi, who carries with him the evva (plague), into their village, and prohibited us ‘from entering if we did © not want war. The war drums beat, and the men ~ advanced and retired before us, spear in hand. We — marched forward nevertheless, and the determined — fellows then set fire to the grass of the open space — leading to the village barricade. Wishing to avoid — an encounter, and also the fire which was spread-— ing at a great rate over the prairie, we turned by | a path leading round the village; but when we had — reached the rear of the place, we found a body of” the villagers moving in the same direction, to stop our further progress. Most of them appeared half intoxicated with palm wine, and I now felt that we 7] were going to have a fight. Presently two poisoned | arrows were shot at us, but they fell short. Nchien- | gain then came up and walked between my men and the irritated warriors, begging me not to fire unless — some of us were hit. The villagers, seeing that we | made no display of force, became bolder, and one of | them came right up and with his bow bent threat- ened to shoot Rapelina. My plucky lad faced the | fellow boldly, and, showing him the muzzle of his — gun, told him he would be a dead man if he did not — instantly put down his bow. All my Commi boys | = Pee . ee ee ee ‘Osap. XII. PLUCK OF MY COMMI BOYS. 245 came up, and ranging themselves on the flanks of our caravan with their guns pointed at the enemy, protected the train of porters as they filed past. I was glad to see also our Apono companions taking our part; they got enraged with the villagers, and some of them laid down their loads, and rushed to the front waving their swords. Strange to say, not one of the villagers came near me, or threatened me in any way. I watched the scene calmly, and surveyed eee field where war might at any moment break out. Behind us the country was all in a blaze, for the fire 4 * spread with great rapidity. The Apono porters being so resolutely on our side, I had no fear as to how ‘the conflict would end. If we had been travelling alone, without guides and porters, we should have “had a serious fight, and it is probable my journey would have come to a termination here in a similar yay to that which afterwards happened in Ashango- land; but it is a point of honour with these primitive i icans that they are bound to defend the strangers whom they have undertaken to convey from one E tibe to another. Had I not been deserted by my ei des in the village where I was finally driven ba k, as will be hereafter narrated, I should have c. n enabled to continue my journey. We went on mur way, Nchiengain shouting from the rear to the a comfited warriors that there would be a palaver settle for this, when he came back. Z Twas prouder then ever of my boys after this, and ed by the occasion to strengthen them in their de ° ote mination to go forward. There was no going kK after this, I told them; they all shouted, “ We 246 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Cuap. XII. must go forward; we are going to the white mans — country ; we are going to London!” We continued our march till half-past four p.m., — when we encamped for the night in the middle of a — wood, where there wasa cool spring of water, close to a cluster of Apono villages. It appeared that these people also dreaded our approach on account of the- eviva. In the evening we heard the cries of the people, the weeping of the women, and the beating i of the war drums. The burthen of their lamentations as “OQ Nchiengain, why have you brought this curse upon us? We do not want the Oguizi, who brings the plague with him. The Ishogo are all dead, the Ashango have left; it is of’no use your taking the white man to them; go back, go back!” We slept with our loaded guns by our side; the war drums ceased beating about 10 o’clock. My men were tired and foot-sore, on account of the sharp stones and pebbles of the prairie paths. June 5th. At daylight this morning I got up om looked out over the broad prairie, quite expecting to see a war-party watching us through the long grass; but to my agreeable surprise, I saw no signs of war. Shortly afterwards a deputation of three mer came from the village to try to persuade Nchiengain not to pass through, on account of my bringing death | wherever I went. But the trusty and sensible old | chief, in a long speech, showed them that it was a _ foolish alarm about my bringing the eviva, and that | the plague came quite independent of me, for it had | passed through his village long before the Oguizi had come near it. The argument seemed to have @| Cuap. XII. ASSEMBLY OF APONOS. 247 good effect; they retired, and shortly afterwards both Nehiengain and Mayolo were sent for to the village ; this was followed by a messenger arriving for me. ~ When I came into the open space chosen for the meeting, at some distance from the village, I was not a little surprised to see about. 200 of the villagers assembled, all gravely seated on the grass, in a group of asemi-circular form. As I advanced towards them, I was amused to see the front row getting uneasy and wriggling off into the rear, followed by the next row, and soon. They put me in mind of a flock of sheep or a herd of deer in a park, when confronted by a man walking slowly up to them. Nchiengain, who appeared to have great influence here, and to be _ acknowledged as a superior chief among the Aponos, succeeded at last in arresting their laughable rear “movement. He then addressed me, saying that he r) had sent for me to tell me that the villagers wished me to leave the wood in which I was encamped, and _ to move to the top of a grassy hill a little further off. IfI did that all the people would come and see me, and bring me food, and on the following day would be willing that I should continue my journey. I declined this proposal, as the top of the hill was too much exposed to the heat of the sun, and I pre- ferred the cool shade of the wood. They finally let _ me have my own way, and my encampment for several hours afterwards was thronged with people. They all said that the report of my bringing the eviva had been spread abroad amongst the tribes for a long distance in the interior by the Ashira people. _ Late in the afternoon, three head men of neigh- 4 bh} 248 MAYOLO TO APONO-LAND. Cuap. XII. bouring villages came to invite us to their respective _ villages. One of the elders was from a large place J not far distant, called Mokaba, and Mayolo recom- — mended me to go to this village in preference to ~ the others, because its representative had offered us the greatest number of goats, namely, three. — When I gave my decision, the other two chiefs were greatly annoyed, and we were very near having a — serious row amongst them: Nchiengain was too far — gone in intoxication, having had a drinking bout with the chiefs of the village where we now were, to accompany us. As we moved off, the two disap-— pointed elders followed, and continued to pester us. One of them had the boldness to come up to me and try to lead me off to his village; it was droll to witness” his fright when I turned sharply on him: he stepped backwards trembling with fear, and waved his leather fan before him, crying, “ Oh, don’t, Oguizi!” After a short march we entered the more friendly town of Mokaba, amidst the shouts of the whole population, I was alarmed at night in finding Mayolo very feverish and unwell. I had noticed the first symp- toms when at Mouendi. & I am happy to say that my own men now enjoy much better health than they did at the commence- ment of our expedition; for, strange to say, these negroes cannot bear as much fatigue and hardship < I do, and generally after a long march or a hunt they _ fell ill. But I could never make them come and tell me as soon as they felt the first symptoms of being un- | well, so, at fixed periods—once a fortnight, or once a_ month, according to the season—they were summoned ~~ "eg of eh ee Guar. XIL THE “MEDICINE PARADE.” 249 to my “dispensary” to be dosed all round. I had fixed days for the different medicines: one day was -eastor-oil day, another was blue-pill or calomel day, a third was the “feast of Epsom salts.” They all had to come up in single file, and, one after the other, were ordered to swallow their dose. Now and then “one or two of them tried to escape the medicine parade ; and, when I called them up,-each had some ready excuse for his non-attendance, but in vain. a This was generally on castor-oil day, for they said that they did not mind the other medicines, but that this was “so bad;” and many were the wry faces that were made before the dose was swallowed by t! ee entire company. However, I found that my an had very good results, as my men had much etter cadiat than they had before I adopted it. - CHAPTER XIIL THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. Mokaba—Curiosity of the People—Renewed illness of Méyolo—His return to Otando—Nchiengain’s Speech—The Apono agree to take me to the Ishogo country — Description of the Apono Tribe — Their sprightly character—Arts— Weapons — Population — Description of Mokaba— —Palm wine—Drunkenness—Ocuya Performances—Leave Mokaba— River Dougoundo—Arrival at Igoumbié—Invitation from the elders — of the village to remain there—Manners of the Ishogos—Description of : Igoumbié—The Ishogo huts—Arrival at Yengué, in Ishogo-land. : June 6th. Mokaba and most of the other villages of the Apono tribe are situated in an open tract of undu-— lating country, partly wooded and partly open prairie. The distance of the town from Mayolo is not more than twenty-seven miles in a direct line, and the altitude above the sea-level is scarcely so great as afl that place, being only 414 feet» whilst Mayolo is 496 feet ; but Mokaba, as I afterwards found, was within a short distance of the Ngouyai, and lay in the valley of the river, whilst Mayolo lies on the lower slope of the mountain range which separates Otando from Ashira-land. Close to the village, on its eastern side, are some fine wooded hills, which give the place a very picturesque appearance when viewed from the western side. The successive mountain ranges to- ~~ wards the east gre not visible from the Apono plai although they formed eras objects from the Otan ee ee AN an Be yy im \N\ Dine RD DN cn MOKABA.—APO NO VILLAGE. AZ Cuar. XUI. CURIOSITY OF THE MOKABA PEOPLE. 251 the other. On the other hand, looking towards the _ west, I could see the fine hilly range beyond Otando, _ stretching in a semi-circle to the Ashira Kamba ter- _ritory, and joining, on the north, the range which _ trends eastward from that point towards the Ashango ~ mountains. The curiosity of the Mokaba people is most trou- blesome, so that, although the villagers have been so much more friendly than those we passed yesterday, Ihave not been muchmore comfortable. The place ‘swarms with people, and I have been haunted, at my encampment, by numbers of sight-seers. The way they come upon me is sometimes quite startling; they sidle up behind trees, or crawl up amongst the long until they are near enough, and then, from be- hind the tree trunks, or above the herbage, a number of soot-black faces suddenly bob out, starmg at me, with eyes and mouth wide open. The least thing I do, elicits shouts of wonder; but if I look directly at them they take to their legs and run as if for their lives. ~ June 7th. I cannot describe how low-spirited I feel at the condition of poor Méyolo this morning. I fear his daysare numbered. He has a burning fever, and ~ was too ill to speak to me, or even to recognise me, - when I entered his hut. The Otando men, who are with us, are to carry him back to his place this after- oon. I thought it just possible that he might have en poisoned by some of these hostile villagers. But he is a hard drinker and has been intoxicated Imost every day, so that this may have been the . . Tag ae _ country, rising in three terrace-like ridges one behind 4 252 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. OCnap. XIII cause of his illness. His people begin to recollect that he was first taken ill the day after he had a dis- pute with his children about beads; and if he dies there will be a frightful witchcraft palaver in Otando. I shall feel his loss greatly, for, besides being a staunch friend, he speaks the Commi language a little, which I understand better than I do any other of these African idioms. He has been therefore a good guide in every way. Fortunately our long stay at Olenda and Mayolo has enabled me to acquire the — Ashira language to some extent. Before the Otando men departed, I went and bid good-bye to Mayolo, but he was too ill to recognise me. After his departure I entreated Nchiengain to hurry me off as quick as he could. He said “ You are in as great a hurry as if you had killed somebody.” I gave to each of Mdyolo’s men and to his wife a_ parting present, and my Commi boys gave them their old garments. The Mokaba people took alarm at night in seeing me look at the stars with my instruments; and the chief, accompanied by his people, came and told me they would build a shed for me at a distance from the houses, as they were afraid of the mysterious work I was doing. I firmly refused, saying that they had made me come to the house where I was staying, and that now I would not remove. June 8th—9th. Still at Mokaba, waiting for port- ers. Messengers came on the 9th for Nchiengain to return to his village, as one of his men had - died; they brought also the news that Mdyolo had been vomiting blood. This was most distressin ‘Cap. XIII. NCHIENGAIN’S SPEECH. 253 intelligence for me. If Mayolo dies I am afraid his death will be imputed to me. I made presents to the chiefs and elders of Mokaba, to keep them in good humour, and gave a gun to Nchiengain. It is settled that nineteen Apono ‘porters are to accompany me to the Ishogo country with their chief Kombila.* Nechiengain returns to his own place. Before he left me we assembled all our new men, and he made a speech to them whilst I distributed the pay. He told them how Olenda had delivered me to Mayolo and Mayolo to him, and that now they must take me safe to the Ishogo people, who would pass me over to the Ashango, and so on. They were to see that I had plenty of goats and plan- tains, and then if their task was well done they would receive their reward as he and his people had ~ done. These speeches always have a good effect for the moment, the excitable negroes become enthusiastic about the journey, and promise even more than they. _are required to do. When Nchiengain was about to leave, he delivered up to me a plate and a kettle which he had borrowed of me when we first became acquainted, that he might show the people how great. * As proper names may be of some utility in the study of the native languages, I subjoin the names of my porters :— Head man, Kombila. Second in command, Mbouka. Tpandi, Kassa, Boushoubou, .Foubou, Mondjego, Djembé, Batali, Mombon, Boulingué, Njomba, Badinga, Nchago, Mozamba, Miyendo, Moueti, Mousoumbi, Mafoumbi, Momelou. 254 _ THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. Cuap. XIII a man he had become to possess such utensils. When he came to borrow them, he said, “ Nchiengain must eat off a plate, and must cook his food with the Oguizi’s kettle; so that the people may know that Nehiengain is‘his friend.” I had quite forgotten the loan, and felt pleased at this display of the old man’s honesty. He gave us all his blessing as he started, and shouted to me, “I have done all I can for you! I have not sighted you! my good wishes go with 99 you. As I am about to leave the Apono country, I must | say here a few words about this tribe of negroes. They are no doubt a branch of the great Ashira — nation, like the Ashira Kamba, the Ashira Ngozai, — and the Otando, all of whom, as well as the Aponos, — speak the Ashira language. The Ashangos also _ speak the Ashira language, although they are divided from the Aponos by the Ishogo, who speak an — entirely different language. But the Aponos are distinguished from all the other branches of the Ashira nation by their sprightliness of character; and they are clean and well-looking. Their villages | are larger, better arranged, and prettier than those of — the Otando and Ashira Ngozai. Each house is built | separate from its neighbours, and they attend to | cleanliness in their domestic arrangements. Their country is an undulating plain, varied with open | grassy places covered with a pebbly soil, and rich and extensive patches of woodland well adap for . agriculture, in which they make their plantations. | I cannot make an estimate of the total population | _ fap, XIII. DESCRIPTION OF THE APONO TRIBE. 255 of the tribe; their villages were numerous along our line of march from Mouendi, but we travelled pro- bably through the most thickly-peopled district. As I have already said, the Aponos, both men and women, are distinguished by their habit of taking out the two middle upper teisors and filing the rest, as well as the four lower, to a point. The women have for ornament tattooed sears on their forehead ; very often these consist of nine rounded prominences similar in size to peas, and arranged in the form of a lozenge between their eye-brows, and they have similar raised marks on their cheeks and a few irregular marks on the chest and abdomen, varying “in pattern in different individuals. They also rub themselves with red powder derived from the common bar-wood of trade. They dress their hair in many ways, but never form it into a high mass as the Ashira used formerly to do, as I have described in ‘Equatorial Africa.’ The Aponos do not practise _ tattooing so much as the Apingi, who decorate their chests and: abdomens with various kinds of raised patterns. I once asked an Apingi man why his _ people covered themselves with such ugly scars; he replied that they were the same as clothing to them. “ Why,” retorted he, “do you cover your- self with so many curious garments?” The Apingi seem to be a small tribe, and the territory they occupy is a narrow strip along the banks of the Ngouyai. They and the Ishogos speak the same language. _ The Aponos are a warlike people, and are rather looked up to with fear by the Apingi and the Ishogos, 256 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LANs. Cuap. XIii whose villages are close to theirs. They are not such skilful workers in iron as the Fans, or as some other _ tribes further to the east. The iron-ore which they use 1s found plentifully in some parts of their prairies ; it occurs in lumps of various sizes, and is dug from the soil; the deeper they dig the larger and purer ~ are the lumps. They melt it in little thick earthen- ware pots, holding about a pint each, and use, of course, charcoal in tempering the metal. Their anvils are large and well-made, but the construction of them is apparently beyond their ability, as all the anvils which I saw came from the Abombo and Njavi tribes, who live further towards the east. The — Abombos and Njavis manufacture also a superior kind of straight sword four feet long, the handle of which is made of wood and is in the shape of a dice- box, through the middle of which the handle-end of the sword passes. The bows of the Aponos are very different from those of the Fans, which I described and figured in” ‘ Adventures in Equatorial Africa ;’ they are not nearly so powerful, but, at the same time, not so clumsy; they are of very tough wood, and bent nearly in a semi-circle, with the chord measuring about two feet, and the string of vegetable fibre. The arrow is rather heavy; the head is of tempered iron, triangular in shape, and prolonged in a tubular form for the insertion of the shaft; the shaft is not secured into the head, so that when the arrow enters into the body of a man or animal, the sharp trian gular lance-head, coated with poison, remains in the wound, whilst the shaft drops out. The arrows are Quar. XIIL APONO WEAPONS. 257 kept in cylindrical quivers made of the bark of a tree, and not in bags. | Their spears, also, are different from those of the Fans, and are similar to those described by Burton, Grant, Speke, and other travellers, as used by the tribes of Eastern Equatorial Africa.* They are much heavier and clumsier than the spears of the Fans, and cannot, therefore, like them, be thrown to a distance. The head is lance-shaped, without barbs, and a foot in length. In fight they are used for thrusting, at close quarters. Swords are the most common weapons with these people; they might, however, be more properly termed sabres than swords, being curved, and having wooden handles. The metal of which the blades are made, although pretty well tempered, by means of the charcoal used, is full of flaws. Some of the people use round _ shields made of wicker-work. Each of my Apono _ porters carried a sabre, besides his bow and quiver of arrows. The possession of a sword is a mark of manhood with these people, and all the young men _ think it honourable to obtain a sword before: they “acquire a wife. In fact, the chief things coveted by the young dandies of the tribe are a sword, a grass- _ web cap of the country, and a handsome dengwi, or garment of striped grass-cloth. The red worsted caps which I carried, as part of my stores, immediately drove their native caps out of fashion, and, indeed, created a perfect furore. It was a sure way of gain- ing the good will of an Apono man to present him with one of these caps. bs * © Adventures in Equatorial Africa,’ p. 80. 258 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. nap. XIIL Like the Ashiras, the Aponos are industrious weavers of grass-cloth, which forms the clothing of both sexes. The cloth is woven in small pieces with a fringe, called bongos, and is sometimes beautifully - fine; when several bongos are sewn together, the garment is called a dengui; the women wear only two — pieces, or bongos, one on each side, secured at the top — over the hips, and meeting in front at the upper edge. It might be supposed, from the frequency with which I met with villages on the march, that the Apono country was thickly inhabited, especially as the villages were large, a few of them containing — about a thousand inhabitants. But it must be recol- — lected that the high-roads, or pathways, along which — we were obliged to march, were the roads leading ~ from one village to another. I travelled, therefore, — through the peopled part of the country. Away from these main pathways there were vast tracts of prairie and some wooded land remaining in their original desert condition. a Upon the whole, I liked the Aponos, and got on~ very well whilst in their country. They showed themselves to be honest, and were faithful in carrying out the engagements they entered into with me, in~ spite of the numerous palavers we had. I lost none of my property by theft whilst I was amongst them. The village of Mokaba is large and well-arranged ; its site, as I have before remarked, is picturesque, and, in short, it was the prettiest alleged I have every) seen in Nac There are upwards of 130 houses or huts, which, as in other West-African villages, are ‘$0 arranged as to form one main street. But, in Mokaba, Onap. XIII. VILLAGE OF MOKABA. 259 several houses are connected so as to form a square, with a common yard or garden in the middle, in which grow magnificerit palm-trees. Behind the houses, too, are very frequently groups of plantain and lime- trees. The village being thus composed of a series of small quadrangles and back-gardens containing trees with beautiful foliage, the whole effect is very charming. In the rear of the houses, amidst the plantain-groves, they keep their goats, fowls, and pigs. This was the only village where I saw tame pigs. I was struck with the regularity of the main street ; but, besides this, there was another narrower street on each side of the village, lying between the backs of the houses and the plantain-groves, and _ kept very neat and closely-weeded. Hach house has “in front a verandah, or little open space without wall, occupying half the length of the house; the other half, in equal portions on each side, forms apartments in which the owners sleep and keep their little property. When a man marries, he imme- } diately builds a house for his new wife; and, as the family increases, other houses are built; the house of each wife being kept separate. The palm-trees in the quadrangles are the property of the chief man of each group of houses; and, being valuable _ property, pass on his death to his heir, the next brother or the nephew, as in other tribes. Some of these palm-trees tower up to a height of 50 feet, and have a singular appearance in the palm-wine season from being hung, beneath the crown, with hollowed gourds receiving the precious liquor. 260 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. Cnap, XIIi The large quantity of palm-trees in and around — the village furnish the Aponos of Mokaba with a ready supply of their favourite drink, palm-wine; _ for, as I have said before, they are a‘merry people, — aud make a regular practice of getting drunk every day as long as the wine is obtainable. I often saw ~ them climb the trees in early morning, and take deep ~ draughts from the calabashes suspended there. Like — most drunken people, they: become quarrelsome; and ~ being a lively and excitable race, many frays occur. Happily the palm-wine season lasts only a few months in the year: it was the height of the drunken season when I was at Mokaba. I saw very few men who had not scars, or the marks of one or more wounds, received in their merry-making scrimmages. Their | holidays are very frequent. Unlimited drinking is | the chief amusement, together with dancing, tam-tam-_ ming, and wild uproar, which last all mght. They are very fond of the ocuya performances. The ocuya | is a man supporting a large framework resembling | a giant, and whimsically dressed and ornamented, | who walks and dances on stilts. In Mokaba, he | appears in a white mask with thick open lips, dis | closing the rows of teeth mnus the middle incisors, | according to the Apono fashion. The long gar-— ment reaches to the ground, covering the stilts. It | struck me as a droll coincidence that his head-dress resembled exactly a lady’s bonnet, at least the re- | vogue; it was surmounted by feathers and made of the skin of a monkey. Behind, however, hung the Cap. XIII. DEPARTURE FROM MOKABA. 261 monkey’s tail, which I cannot say has its parallel in Huropean fashions, at least at present. June 10th. We left Mokaba at a quarter-past ten, a.m., having been detained since sunrise by the effects of the palm wine. Every one of my porters was more or less tipsy ; and after they had drunk all the wine there was in the village they had not had enough, but went into the woods to fetch down the calabashes that had been left on the palm-trees to eatch the liquor. About an hour before starting we had a heavy shower of rain, which lasted a few minutes. It was the first rain we had had since we lett Mayolo. Leaving Mokaba, we pursued a direction a little north of east. The ground soon began to rise, and we entered on a richly-wooded hilly country, in which were numerous plantations and villages ot ‘slaves belonging to the head men of Mokaba. At a plantation called Njavi, my aneroids. showed me _ that we were 200 feet above Mokaba. This place is | called Njavi probably on account of the’ plantation being worked by slaves from the Njavi country. We halted here a short time, for some of the porters were not very strong on their legs. From Njavi I could see the mountains where the Kamba people live. They seemed, after leaving a gap, to unite with a range on this side. The gap was a continuation of the valley in which flows the Rembo Ngouyai. % At twenty minutes to two we came to the dry bed of a stream with a slaty bottom, which ran from N.E. to S.W. Shortly afterwards, we crossed a } ’ 262 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. Cuap. XDUL another similar stream flowing over slaty rocks, called Dougoundo; this had running water. We halted on its banks for about twenty minutes, and during our rest, I found by observations that we 5 had descended since leaving the Njavi plantation. The altitude of the plantation was 610 feet, the rivulet — Dougoundo was only 473 feet above the sea-level. — Near our halting-place were two Ishogo villages, but 4 we did not go to them. | We continued our journey to the south-east, and © at half-past three arrived at a large Ishogo village — called Igoumbié. We did not intend to stay, and marched straight through; the people all hiding — themselves in their huts, with the exception of a | few men bolder than the rest, who stood staring at us, without uttermg a word, as we marched along. When we had passed through the village, we stopped near the road or pathway on the other side, about fifty yards beyond. Then Kombila and_ some of our Apono men went back to the village, and spoke to the people. One of the elders of the place was a great friend of Kombila’s, and they all knew the Mokaba people. So one of the elders, — named Boulingué, Kombila’s friend, came back with | him to our encampment, and begged me to come and | stay in the village, saying that they did not wish us — to pass their place without their giving us something — to eat. As we had no meat in store, and one of my Commi men wanted rest for his sore leg, lamed by a— kettle having fallen on it, I accepted the invitation, — and we passed the night at this place. % I could not ascertain who was the chief of this — Nt Se Guar. XIII. ARRIVAL AT IGOUMBIE. . 263 village, if therewasany. Since I have left Mouendi I cannot find out that there are any head men or chiefs in the villages, but there seemed to be a certain number of elders, who hold authority over their respective villages. Here. three elders, beating the kendo, came and presented me, each one, with a goat and several bunches of plantains—prefacing their presents with three tremendously long speeches. | At a glance I perceived that I was among quite a different people from those I had hitherto met with. The mode of dressing the hair, both with men and women; the shape of their houses, each with its door ; the men smeared with red powder; all these points denoted a perfectly different people. I was glad to remain for a couple of nights at Igoumbié, for I wanted to take as many observations as I could. | | After I had distributed some beads among the Women in the evening, a few became more friendly —especially as my Apono porters were never tired of praising me. They seemed also to be much pleased at seeing that, of the three goats which the people of their village had presented to me, I had given two to my porters. I was very much amused with these Ishogos, especially with the women. When they thought I was not looking at them, they would partially open ‘the door of their hut and peep out at me. As soon as I looked at them, they immediately closed the door, as if greatly alarmed. When they had to go from one house to another, and had to pass the hut in which I was located, and at the door of which J 264 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. OCOnap. XIIL was seated, they hurriedly crossed to the other side of the street, putting their hand up to the side of their face so that they might not see me—apparently with a view to avoid or avert the “evil eye.” My Aponos were very indignant at this, and said, with an air of evident superiority, and as though they had — been with me all their lives, ““ When have these men of the woods seen an Oguizi before ?” Though I was very tired, yet I did not go to bed until I had taken several meridian altitudes of stars, in order to ascertain my latitude. The process caused — the greatest astonishment to the natives. June 11th. Igoumbié is the largest village I hav met with yet, and forms one long and tolerably broad street. I counted 191 huts; each hut has a wooden door, and is divided into three compartments or — chambers. The houses are generally placed close to each other, not wide apart like the houses of the Aponos. There are many of the curious alumbi_ houses scattered about. A large mbuiti or idol house stands about halfway down the street, with a mon- strous wooden image inside, which the villagers hold in great reverence. The village being so large, the inhabitants seem to have thought it required several | palaver-houses, for I noticed four or five. The palaver-house is an open shed, which answers the purpose of a public-house, club-room, or town-hall, to | these people; they meet there daily to smoke and — gossip, hold public trials or palavers, and receive | strangers. What was most remarkable, there was here an attempt at decorative work on the doors of many of — the houses, The huts, neatly built, with walls formed | WITH ORNAMENTAL DOORS, b] ISHOGO HOUSES Cuar. XIII. HUTS OF THE ISHOGOS. 265 _ of the bark of trees, had their doors painted red, white, and black, in complicated and sometimes not inelegant patterns. These doors were very inge- _niously made; they turned upon pivots above and below, which worked in the frame instead of hinges. Each house is of an oblong shape, about twenty-two feet long by ten or twelve feet broad; the door being in the middle of the front, three and a half feet high and two and a half feet broad. The walls are four and a half feet high and the highest pee of the roof is about nine feet. I could not sleep last night on account of the noise “made by these Ishogos. They sang their mbuiti “songs until daylight, marching from one end of the village to the other. When at a distance their ‘singing did not sound unpleasant, but when close by “it was almost deafening. During the day I made friends with the Ishogos, and gave them sundry small presents. Many of the women came and gave | | me bunches of plantains, sugar cane, and ground- ay yr 4 ~~) wel a © lee je > 7 nuts, and seemed much pleased when I tasted them. _ In the evening the atmosphere was very clear, | and I was glad to be able to take some more meridian altitudes and a good many lunar distances. | By the time I had written down my journal, and recorded my astronomical observations, it was half- | past two in the morning, and, after a hard day’s work, I was glad to get to bade especially as we had _to leave Igoumbié early the next morning. June 12th. We took leave of Igoumbié a little | before eight a.m. The people seemed unwilling to 266 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. Cuap. XU day. At nine we passed over a high hill called — Neoondja. A number of Apono people from a vil- — lage a few miles off, including four of their head — men, accompanied us for some distance. Some tam- pering took place with my Apono porters, and I had great difficulty in preventing them from throwing ~ down their loads and going back. It was an awk- © ward position to be placed in; but, by dint of coaxing ~ and promising extra pay if they would accompany Kombila to the place to which he and they had — agreed to take me, they resumed their loads, and we continued our march. We passed two Apono villages near together; and halted for breakfast by a small stream of water near the second one. We were soon surrounded by | villagers bringing fowls and plantains. The noise and confusion were so great that I went away alone. for a walk in the thick of the forest, leaving my men to bargain for fowls and eggs. All the villagers wanted to get some of my beads. j We resumed our march at half-past twelve. Kom- bila annoyed me much by slinking behind, and getting drunk with another of my men, named Mbouka, an elder of Mokaba, who at the last moment said he would accompany us for a walk. Under one pretext or another they had remained behind; and as they had told the villagers to follow them “ with the drink,” when they knew that I was far enough off, they took their libations. They both made their appearance after causing a long delay, and Mbouka had a calabash of palm wine in one of the country bags, which I detected, the bag being of a great size Cuap, XIII. DIFFICULTIES WITH PORTERS. 267 I was resolved to put a stop to this, so forced the man to give up his bag, and poured the wine out on the ground, to the great dismay of Kombila, and to the extreme indignation of Mbouka, who grieved _ that the earth should receive the wine that would have so rejoiced his stomach. He protested that I ought to pay him back the beads he had paid for the wine. This palm-wine drinking had been for 4 some time a great annoyance to me. Our porters _ squandered their pay (which consisted chiefly of _ beads) in buying wine at the villages, and were thus spending all their money before we reached the _ journey’s end. I was glad that at Igoumbié there were no palm-trees, so they could get no wine there : _ besides, the Ishogos of that place are far more sober than the Aponos. What with this, and other inter- _ Tuptions and squabbles, and losing the path for some | time, we made but little progress to-day, although _ we marched till dark. June 13th. We left our encampment at half-past six am. The Apono porters threatened again to leave _ their loads unless I gave them an increase of pay ; but | I was determined to resist this imposition, and de- | clared I would shoot down the first man that mutinied. ~ My Commi boys kept close watch over the rascals Juring our morning’s march. We travelled in an easterly direction. In the course of an hour we crossed the Bouloungou, a dry ‘ stream, similar to those we had crossed on the 10th; its bed was slaty, as was the hill down which it flowed. We have met with no quartz blocks or granite since saving Mokaba. The paths along which we have 268 THE MARCH THROUGH APONO-LAND. Czap. XIII. marched have been covered with fragments of fer- ruginous sandstone, the corners and edges of which hurt the feet of my men very much. We passed over a hill of considerable elevation, but, my aneroids being packed away, I did not stop to unload and take the altitude. Eastward, it sloped down rapidly — until we reached a fine valley, with miles of plantations of ground-nuts, Finally, we came to Yengué, an © [shogo village, almost as large as Igoumbié, situated on the banks ofa river called Ogoulou, one of the affluents of the Ngouyai. Before entering the village, we stopped until all the porters were collected together. Then Kombila © and I took the lead, followed by my Commi men, ~ after whom came the Apono porters. We marched ~ through the street of the village—the villagers look- ing at us, open-mouthed—until we reached the large — ouandja, which was almost at the farthest extremity of the village; Kombila all the time exclaiming to — the alarmed villagers, “Do not be afraid; we have come to see you as friends!” J Kombila then went and spoke to some of the elders, who came to me, and presented fowls and plantains—the presence of my Apono guides, whom they knew to be on good terms with me, re-assured them: and, after a short delay, they allotted a house to me and my Commi boys; while my Aponos went i to lodge with their friends, q “ CHAPTER XIV. JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Village of the Obongos or Dwarf Negroes — Their Dwellings — Absence of the Inhabitants — The Elders and People of Yengué— Arrival of the Chief of Yengué— War Dance of the Aponos — Ceremony of the Mpaza — An uproarious Night — Good conduct of the Apono Porters — The River Ogoulou — Geographical Position and Altitude of Yengué — Pass- age of the Ogoulou— March to the Plateau of Mokenga— Eastern Limits of Ishogo-land—Quembila King of Mokenga— Palavers — Contention between Chiefs for the possession of the “ Ibamba ”—Panic .in Mokenga — Re-adjustment of Baggage — Ishogo Porters. On our way to Yengué, in traversing one of the tracts of wild forest through which runs the high- way cf the country, we came suddenly upon a clus- ter of most extraordinary diminutive huts, which I _ should have passed by, thinking them to be some _ kind of fetich-houses, if I had not been told that we | might meet in this district with villages of a tribe of _ dwarf negroes, who are scattered about the Ishogo and Ashango countries and other parts further east. I had heard of these people during my former _ journey in the Apingi country, under the name of Ashoungas; they are called here, however, Obongos. _ From the loose and exaggerated descriptions I had -heard on my former journey, I had given no credence to the report of the existence of these dwarf tribes, and had not thought the subject worthy of mention in my former narrative. The sight of these extra- 270 JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Cuap. XIV ordinary dwellings filled me with curiosity, for it was really a village of this curious people. I rushed forward, hoping to find some at least of their tenants inside, but they had fled on our appagach into the — neighbouring jungle. The huts were of a low oval — shape, like a gipsey tent; the highest part—that — nearest the entrance—was about four feet from the ~ ground; the greatest breadth was about four feet also. On each side were three or four sticks for the man and woman to sleep upon. The huts were made of — flexible branches of trees, arched over and fixed © into the ground at each end, the longest branches — being in the middle, and the others successively — shorter, the whole being covered with large leaves. When I entered the huts, I found in each the remains — of a fire in the middle of the floor. ; It was a sore disappointment for me to miss this opportunity of seeing and examining these people. — We scoured the neighbourhood for some distance, but — could find no traces of them. A few days after-— wards, at Niembouai, as will presently be seen, I was — more fortunate. | : As usual, the king was not in the village. | But one of the elders took great care of me; so after a while I called him into my house, and — made Kombila tell him that I had not come to do- | them harm, but good. Then I put on his head a bright shining red cap, and round his neck a string” of very showy beads. As he came out of my hut, the shouts of the people were deafening. I then | distributed a few beads among the women. . My — Aponos did the same, and to-night the ice is partly | re ti * a uy ; : Cuap. XIV. THE CHIEF OF YENGUE. 271 broken, and the people are very friendly with me. Kombila having told the women that I was very fond of sugar-cane and ground-nuts, they brought me some, laying them at my feet. In return I gave _ them beads, and chatted with as many as I could get 4 to talk to me. ; June 14th. The man pial I suppose to be che head chief of Yengué arrived in town this __ afternoon. It appears that he had fled through fear at my approach, and had gained confidence only on _ hearing that [ was not such a dreadful being as he had imagined. The news of the red cap I had " given to the elder had reached his ears; for the first thing he asked me was whether I wiped give him ‘one also. He told me that he had also heard that I had given beads to some of his wives, and to other ‘women in the village. Last night I heard a man _ walking in the streets of the village and saying, in | atone of voice like that of a town crier: “ We have | an Oguizi amongst us. Beware! There is no mondah | to prevent us from seeing him during the day, but de no one try to see him in his house at night, for whoever does so is sure to die.” It was one of the Waa. ers walking through the village and making this P roclamation in the usual way in which laws are innounced in this country. f _ After the arrival of the chief, things looked quite romising. A formal reception palaver took place in open street, the Apono people seated in a row n one side, and the Ishogos on the other. Kom- . ila stated at great length, as usual, the objects of ‘My journey, and the king answered in a speech of it ' : 972 JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Cinar. XIV greater length still. The chief gave to Kombila, as presents for me, two goats, ten fowls, nine bunches of plantains, and a native anvil. The ceremony finished in a kind of war-dancs, in which the — Aponos took part. This kind of dance is called by the Aponos M’muirri. It is a war-dance, performed only by the men, and is remarkable for the singular noises the dancers make, — yelling and beating their breasts with both hands, like — the gorilla, and making a loud vibrating noise with their lips resembling the word “ muirri.” The men form a line, and, in dancing, advance and retreat. The dance waxes furious as it goes on, and the noise ~ becomes deafening. After it was over, the uproar was continued by the whole village joming in. the fes- — tivities, singing, beating the tam-tam, and rattling ~ pieces of wood together, until my head reeled again, ~The noise was continued throughout the night; and, as it was impossible to sleep, I got up at four | o'clock and walked in the fresh morning air. The people were then parading up and down the street, | singing loud and long enough to make them hoarse for a month after. At daylight I heard the voice of the chief proclaiming something or other, and imme-_| diately afterwards there was dead silence throughout | the village. | The singing and dancing during this uproarious | night were partly connected with a curious ceremony | of this people, namely, the celebration of the mpaza, | or the release from the long deprivation of liberty which a woman suffers who has had the misfortune | to bring forth twins. tA ‘ Guar. XIV. CEREMONY OF THE MPAZA. 273 { _ The custom altogether is a very strange one, but itis by no means peculiar to the Ishogos, although this is the first time I witnessed the doings. The negroes of this part of Africa have a strange notion’ or superstition that when twins (mpaza) are born, one of them must die early ; so, in order, apparently, to avoid such a calamity, the mother is confined to her hut, or rather restricted in her intercourse with her . neighbours, until both the children have grown up, _ when the danger is supposed to have passed. She is allowed during this time to go to the forest, but is not permitted to speak to any one not penis to her family. During the long confinement no one but the father and mother are allowed to enter the ‘hut, and the woman must remain chaste. If a “stranger goes in by any accident or mistake, he is seized and sold into slavery. The twins themselves are excluded from the society of other children, and | - cooking utensils, water vessels, &c., of the family are tabooed to everybody else. Some of the notions _ have a resemblance to the nonsense believed in by old nurses in more civilized countries ; such as, for instance, the belief that when the mother takes one 7 forth. __ The house where the twins were born is always marked in some way to distinguish it from the Others, in order to prevent mistakes. Here in a loor, at the top of which was a piece of cloth, and at the foot of the door were a number of pegs stuck in ye ae O74 JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Cuap. XIV. the ground, and painted white. The twins were now six years old, and the poor woman was released from her six years’ imprisonment on the day of my arrival. During the day two women were stationed at the door of the house with their faces and legs painted white—one was the doctor, the other the mother. ‘The festivities commenced by their marching down — the street, one beating a drum with a slow measured ~ beat, and the other singing. The dancing, singing, — and drinking of all the villagers then set in for the night. After the ceremony the twins were allowed to go about like other children. In consequence of © all this trouble and restriction of liberty, the bringing — forth of twins is considered, and no wonder, by the women as a great calamity. Nothing irritates or annoys an expectant mother in these countries so_ much as to point to her and tell her that she is sure to have twins. The tribes here are far milder than those found near Lagos, or in East Africa, where, as Burton men- tions, twins are always killed ienvelin ie on their being born. ; ' June 15th. I awoke this morning rather unwell from having had so disturbed a night; and when the king came to shake hands with me—a custom I had taught him to adopt—I refused his proffered hand, saying that I was angry, and annoyed at the dis: turbances of the past night. Whereupon the mild- | tempered chief promised that the next night they should sing a long way from my resting-place. We | then became better friends than ever, — i In the evening I gave him his present. He came — Cuap. XIV. GOOD CONDUCT OF THE APONO PORTERS. 275 alone, having requested me to give it to him at night, so that the people might not see what he got. [I also gave a handsome present to his head wife. As my Apono porters had now brought me to Ishogo-land, and had shown themselves discon- tented several times during the march, I called them all together this morning, and told them I did not wish them to take me any further, but would pay them and send them back to their country. At this Kombila came forward and begged of me not to mind what the boys had said. To leave me here in a village of strangers would fill him and them with shame. They had hearts, and would not think of going back to their own country, before taking me to the place to which they were bound. He said the — chief of this place to which he wished to take me was a true friend of his, and that not until he had delivered me into his hands could he dare to show himself again in Mokaba. All the porters applauded __ the speech, and declared their readiness to go-further on; and said, laughing, that I must not mind what ty they did, as they were only trying to get something more. This is a sample of the uncertainty of all _ dealings with ce fickle, but not wholly evil-minded, _ savages. The chief of the Ishogo village to whom | we are bound is, I am now told, to take me forward into Ashango-land. _ The river Ogoulou, on the banks of which Yengué _ is situated, is a fine stream forty or fifty yards broad, and of great depth in the rainy season. It is now about ten feet deep, and I perceived that it was fifteen feet lower than the highest water-mark. The banks —— 276 JOURNEY THROUGH. ISHOGO-LAND. Cuap. XIV. of the river show signs of a very considerable popu- lation ; for about a mile on each side the valley is full of plantations both new and old; the most extensive plantations of ground-nuts I ever saw in Africa are found here—they extend along the slopes of the banks of the river for miles. I once thought.a small — steamer might reach this place from above the Samba ~ Nagoshi Falls, but I was told on my return journey — that there was an obstruction in the shape of rapids a few miles below Yengué. By taking the meridian — altitude of two stars, I found the latitude of Yengué ~ to be 2° 0’ 49” S. I could not take lunar distances — to determine the longitude, as the sky was constantly — covered with a leaden veil of cloud at night. The ~ altitude above the sea-level is. 369 feet; this seems — a low elevation, but Yengué les in a valley much” depressed below the general level of the country. The river flows through a most beautiful country, and is the largest feeder of the Rembo Ngouyai above © the Falls, that I have seen. | June 16th. This morning, whilst making preparadl tions for the continuation of our journey, a deputation arrived from an Apono village some miles south of Yengué, the chief of which was a brother of Kombila, bringing us an invitation to visit it on our way. The chief promised to take us from his village to the Ashango country. I declined the offer, as the route would have taken me too far south, and I had already diverged more towards the south than I had in- tended. | The Yengué people were afraid I should take tk . canoes by force to cross the Ogoulou, and when I was - 7. Caap. XIV. PASSAGE OF THE OGOULOU. 277 about to start had hidden them in the jungle. It required a long parley to bring them to reason. At length three ferry-boats were brought, one old and rotten. The owner of this last boat was an old man, who knew how to drive a very hard bargain: he required four measures of powder for the loan of the boats, and when I had given him four asked five, _when I had given him five he raised his demands to six, and so on. It finished at last in the usual way by _ my indignantly refusing his demands; he then came - round to more moderate terms,—the more readily, _ because he saw that the other two boat-owners were _ ready to take us at my price—and we embarked, _ all Yengué crowding down to the water-side to see us off, the chief himself leading me to the boat. _ After crossing the Ogoulou (which I have named _ the Eckmiihl in honour of a dear friend in France) we _ passed through a tract of forest varied with numerous _ plantations. of the natives, the river flowing through ‘3 a fertile alluvial valley, between ranges of hills. Before we had emerged from the river valley we | passed through several Ishogo villages; the country _ then began to rise, and we marched over a hilly - district, all covered, as usual, with impenetrable jungle. The forest paths were narrow, and the - most varied and strange forms of vegetation rose on either side. We were delayed some time on the way ; Besiting for elgg At two p.m. we reached an 278 JOURNEY. THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Cuar. XIV The place appeared deserted when we entered, all the doors were closed, and we took possession, undis- turbed, of a large unoccupied shed. A few men soon afterwards were seen peeping at us from afar with frightened looks. Kombila shouted to them, “ Howis — it that when strangers come to your village you do — not hasten to salute them?” They recognised some of the Aponos, and shouted back, “ You are right, you are right!” Then they came to us and gave us the usual salutation of the Ishogos, which is done by — clapping the hands together and stretching them out, — alternately, several times. We returned the com- pliment in the same form, and then ensued much tedious speechifying on the part of Kombila, who related all that had happened to us since we com- menced our expedition; what fine things I gave to- the villagers among whom we stayed; how, when we stopped at Yengué, and the people of Yengué wanted them to leave me with them, they refused, and said they would take me to the Ashango country ;_ and that now they said they would stay with me until they brought me back safe to Mokenga. | Then Kombila cried out, with all the might of his stentorian voice, “If you are not pleased, tell us, and we will take the Spirit to another village, ‘where the people will be glad to welcome us.’ Then all the elders of the village witlidaea gether, and shortly returned, saying, “We have heard what. you have said; we are pleased, ani gladly welcome the Spirit.” They then told us that the king was not in th village. I noticed that every time I came into a Onap. XIV. VILLAGE OF MUOKENGA. 279 new village, the king ran away. They added that they would send for him; meantime, food was brought to us, as is always the custom on such occasions, and things looked pleasant. The “ M’bolo” salutation common to the Mpongwés of the Gaboon and all the tribes of the Ogobai is unknown in this interior country. June 17th. Last night, as some of my men were fixing their mosquito nets outside the huts, they were told by the Mokenga people that they had better sleep inside and secure well the doors, as leopards _ were roaming about the village, and had lately killed many of their dogs and goats. They added that in a neighbouring village a leopard had killed several people. So careful were they of my safety, that a body- _ guard of three of my men came to protect me whilst I was out taking meridian altitudes of a and 6 Centauri ‘and Arcturus. One of them fell asleep before my work was half done, and made the rest of us laugh by snoring most boisterously. This sort of thing gene- rally happened when any of the negroes pretended to keep watch whilst I was out in the night taking Bitservations. I was once startled at midnight by hearing a formidable snore close to where I stood. Baking on the ground I saw my man Igalo fast -asleep, his gun by his side. Kicking him gently, I asked him why he was not in his hut. He replied : “Do you think I could leave you here alone at night -amongst people who use poisoned arrows? No; I keep watch.” I laughed at the poor fellow’s style of keeping watch, but felt, nevertheless, glad of this proof of his good intentions. I was annoyed to find Be) aie 21 280 JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Cnap. XIV. — my second boiling-point apparatus broken to-day; I _ have now only one left. My aneroids and boiling- — point thermometers have corresponded well so far. June 18th. The king made his appearance to-day, — thinking that the bad wind or plague I had brought — with me had now had time to blow away. He was clad in grass-cloth, and wore a covering on his head in shape somewhat resembling a turban. On his arrival a grand palaver was held; the Ishogo people ranging themselves on one side, and my Apono attendants and Commi body-guard on the other. According to the usual formula, Kombila commenced the speechify- ing, beginning with a history of my progress through the interior from the beginning. Like the chiefs described by Captain Burton in Abbeokuta, these Africans would bégin their long rigmaroles from the time of Adam if they could. At last Kombila came to the enumeration of the presents I had received from the chief of Yengué, and he drew the conclusion that he of Mokenga ought to give at least as much, The allusion to goats, fowls, and plantains drew forth great cheers on the part of my Apono attendants, for thoughts of gourmandizing were always upper most in their minds, and the faces of my own boys brightened also ; for they are quite as fond of 50m feeding as my Aponos. In the middle of the palaver an amusing scené occurred. Our pertinacious friend, the brother 7 Kombila, and chief of a neighbouring Apono village had been to his place and returned with a preseaaa for (0 me of two goats, with the purpose of bribing met go by way of his place to Ashango-land. The jealous Cap. XIV. CONTENTION BETWEEN CHIEFS. 281 of the Ishogos was aroused ; they seized the men who had brought the goats, and said: “ Do you think we have no goats to give the Ibamba and no men to take him to the Ashango country? Take back your goats; he will not go with you; we will ask him his mouth (intention).’”’ Of course my answer was that I should go forward with the Ishogos, for a march by way of the Apono village would take me out of my direct easterly course. The word “ibamba,” which was now commonly applied to me, is the Ishogo equi- valent of the Commi term “ ntangani” or white man. I had thoroughly secured the friendship of these Mokenga villagers. It is wonderful how the distri- bution of a few red caps and beads softens the heart of the primitive African. They were determined to stick to me, and Kombila’s brother was discomfited. More speeches followed from the elders of Mokenga, the kendo of King Quembila was beaten, the presents _ were brought out, and the king, with one of my red eaps stuck on his head, accepted my proffered hand, and all things were pleasant. The sky has been cloudy all day, the sun shining only for half an hour towards eleven a.m. A similar state of the atmosphere has existed for several days _ past, the clouds generally clearing away about seven in the evening, but the sky remaining filled with haze, and at the rising of the moon becoming cloudy again. I have not been able to see the moon at all in the morning, and have been unable to take a lunar dis- tance. | June 19th. A panic seized the Ishogos at night. The news somehow spread through the village (no 282 JOURNEY THROUGH ISHOGO-LAND. Cuap. XIV one could tell who brought it) that in all the villages I had gone through the people were dying fast, especially those to whom I had given things. The fear was so great that many of the women took the beads I had given them and threw them away in the woods. Happily Quembila took my part, and said it was not true, but that the people of other villages originated the report through jealousy. I assembled — the villagers together, and addressed him in the usual 7 way by parable. “When you marry a woman,’ I said, “ she loves you, she brings you plenty of food, — she presents you with the fish she catches in the — forest. streams; are you then to flog her? (Cries of © ‘No, no!”) But it is this which happens when I come to your village. You give me food, you give — me a house to live im, your women are kind to me—~ how, then, can I bring evil on you?” They all shouted: “ You are right, the Ishogos are jealous of us ; they spread bad news to prevent us getting some of your good things.’ Many of the young men ~ came forward and offered themselves as porters to. take me to the Ashango country ; while the chief and the elders came and presented me with a goat as a peace-offering, saying they were sorry for what the people had done, and for the offence they had given” me by being afraid of me. J June 19th. It being thus agreed that the Ishogos should take me to the Ashango country, I dismissed my Apono party this afternoon, after calling them all together and giving to each a parting present in addition to their pay, which they had already — received, I also gave them a goat for food on their | ase iy a Cuap. XIV. RE-ADJUSTMENT OF BAGGAGE. 288 way back. These parting presents always produced a good effect, both on the people I dismissed and the fresh ones I was about to engage. The Aponos departed in good humour and full of thanks. We were all glad to get rid of these troublesome though well-meaning Aponos, as we then thought them; but we found reason afterwards to regret them, as they were far better workers than the lazy Ishogos. June 20th. The diminution of my stores necessitated are-arrangement of the loads. All the otaitais (porters’ baskets) were opened, and the contents re-sorted. This travelling life is not a lazy one; I am busy from morning till night, and the quiet hours after the people have retired to rest are the only time I have for writing my journal, projecting my route, and writing out three copies of my astronomical and other observations. In the daytime, besides the time , wasted in almost incessant palavering, I am beset by _ crowds of gaping villagers from sunrise to sundown. _ At night I have got into the habit of waking fre- - quently and going out to watch for chances of taking - observations for longitude and latitude; chances not | of frequent occurrence in this cloudy Betiats at this time of the year. These savages do not seem to sleep at night, for - they sing and dance and beat their tam-tams until “morning. They seem to be afraid of darkness, be- lieving that night is the time when the spells of witchcraft are the most potent. _ June 21st. I engaged eighteen Ishogo porters, pay- ! ing them, as customary, their wages beforehand, and ‘promising them further pay if they performed their 284 JOURNEY THROUGH [SHOGO-LAND. Cuap. XIV. engagements to my satisfaction. I also gave a pre- sent to each of the elders who had given me goats, fowls, or plantains. King Quembila is too old and feeble to accompany me, so I am to have as guide one of the leading men, named Mokounga.* * The following are the names of my Ishogo party :— Head man, Mokounga. Mokanbi, Nchiengani-orere, Maboungo, Mokanbiyengo, Mondjo, Moqui4, Nchiengani, ~ Doutai, Mandolo, Maduta, Mogangué, Medjambi, Makima, Matomba, _ Nechando. Madibako, Mandia, CHAPTER XV. : FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. The Ishogos— Their Modes of dressing the Hair—JIshogo Villages — Picturesque Scenery —Granitic Boulders— Grooved Rocks — Leave Mokenga— Cross the Dongon — Continued Ascent — Mount Migoma — The River Odiganga — Boundaries of Ishogo and Ashango-lands — Arrival at Magonga—Plateau of Madombo—Mutiny of Ishogo Porters —An unfriendly Village — Elevated Country — Arrival and friendly Reception at Niembouai— The King’s Wives— Prejudices of the Commi Men — Hear of a large River towards the East — The Ashangui Tribe—The Obongos. Tue Ishogos are a fine tribe of negroes; they are strongly and well built, with well-developed limbs and broad shoulders. I consider them superior to ‘the Ashiras in physique, and I remarked that they ~ generally had finer heads, broader in the part where | phrenologists place the organs of ideality. With some of them their general appearance reminded me of the Fans. The women have good figures; they _ tattoo themselves in various parts of the body—on the shoulders, arms, breast, back, and abdomen— and some of them have raised pea-like marks similar _ to those of the Apono women, between the eye-brows and on the cheeks, Both men and women adopt the custom of pulling out the two middle incisors of the upper jaw, but this mode of adding to their personal attraction is not so general as among the Aponos; 286 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuar. XV, many file their upper incisors and two or three of the lower ones to a point. The men and women ornament them&elves with red powder, made by rubbing two pieces of bar-wood together; but their most remarkable fashions relate to the dressing of the hair. On my arrival at Igoumbié, I had noticed how curious the head-dresses of the women were, being so unlike the fashions I ~ had seen among any of the tribes I had visited. — Although these modes are sometimes very grotesque, — they are not devoid of what English ladies, with — their present fashions, might consider good taste: in — short, they cultivate a remarkable sort of chignons. I _ have remarked three different ways of hair-dressing — as most prevalent among the Ishogo belles. The first is to train the hair into a tower-shaped mass elevated from eight to ten inches from the crown of. the head; the hair from the forehead to the base of the tower, and also that of the back part up to the ears, being closely shaved off. In order to give shape to the tower, they make a framework, gene- rally out of old pieces of grass-cloth, and fix the hair round it. All the chignons are worked up on a frame. Another mode is to wear the tower, with two round balls of hair, one on each side, above the ear. : | A third fashion is similar to the first, but the tower, instead of being perpendicular to the crown, is inclined obliquely from the back of the head, and the front of the head is clean shaven almost to the middle. The neck is also shorn closely up to the ears. 4 ISHOGO FASHIONS.—HORIZONTAL CHIGNON., ; Gur. XV. MODES OF DRESSING THE Hal. 287 ol _ The hair on these towers has a parting in the _ middle and on the sides, which is very neatly done. ‘The whole structure must require years of careful "training before it reaches the perfection attained by é - the leaders of Ishogo fashion. A really good chignon is not attained until the owner is about twenty or _ twenty-five years of age. It is the chief object of ambition with the young Ishogo women to possess a good well-trained and well-greased tower of hair of the kind that I describe. Some ‘women are far better dressers of hair than others, and are much sought for —the fixing and cleaning of the hair requiring a Be ne day’s work. _ The woman who desires to have her hair dressed must either pay the hair-dresser or must promise to per- form the same kind office to her neighbour 1 in return. - Once fixed, these chignons remain for a couple of months without requiring to be re-arranged, and the ass of insect life that accumulates in them during hat period is truly astonishing. However, the women nake use of their large iron or lvory hairpinis (which Dileceribed in ‘Hquatorial Africa’) in the place of a The fashion of the “chignon” was unknown en I left Hurope, so that to the belles of Africa belongs the credit of the invention The women “ no ornaments in the ears, and I saw none who id their ears pierced; they are very different from Brine i in this respect. Like the women of other ibes, s, they are not allowed to wear more than two iguis, or pieces of grass-cloth, by way of petticoat. oe clothing has a ludicrous effect in the fat Mes, as the pieces do not then meet well in the middle. 288 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND, Car. XY, The men also have fancy ways of trimming their hair. The most fashionable style is to shave the whole of the head except a circular patch on the crown, and to form this into three finely-plaited — _ divisions, each terminating in a point and hanging down. At the end of each of these they fix a large © bead or a piece of iron or brass wire, so that the — effect 1s very singular. The Ishogo people shave their eyebrows and pull out their eyelashes. The native razor, with which both men and women — shave themselves, is a kind of curved and pointed knife made of iron, well worked and tempered with charcoal, the cutting edge being the convex side. It is four or five inches long and has a wooden handle. Slabs of slaty stone are used as whetstones. The Ishogo villages are large. Indeed, what most strikes the traveller in coming from the sea- coast to this inland country, is the large size, neat- ness, and beauty of the villages. They generally have about 150 or 160 huts, arranged in streets, which are very broad and kept remarkably clean, Hach house has a door of wood which is painted 1 in fanciful designs with red, white, and black. One pattern struck me as simple and effective ; it was number of black spots margined with hie painte 2d in regular rows on a red ground, But my rea must uot run away with the idea that the doors a hike those of the houses of civilized people ; they anf seldom more than two feet and a half high. The door of my house was just twenty-seven inches high. It is fortunate that Iam a short man, other. wise it would have been hard exercise to go ISHOGO FASHIONS.—VERTICAL CHIGNON, . . = ; \ . . . = | ‘ ‘ 7 - ‘ oy . } ’ ‘. ' ak i * } As . Pi > $; Ls a _ oe 7 i Lita ri vie A be ae i ‘ t sey 4 ¥ oO ee a) Nes ——=S S SS 2 A SS SS : SS S S S —-~ \ — S S= ee S = SS=z . — ~ Wu ili fy y) ISHOGO FASHIONS.—MALE HEAD- DRESS. aed * , Cuap. XV. ISHOGO VILLAGES. 289 and out of my lodgings. The planks of which the doors are made are cut with great labour by native axes out of trunks of trees, one trunk seldom yielding more than one good plank. My hut, an average- sized dwelling, was twenty feet long and eight feet broad. It was divided into three rooms or compart ments, the middle one, into which the door opened, being a little larger than the other two. The wealth of an Ishogo man, contained in his hut, consists of numerous baskets and dishes or large plates made of wicker-work, and a large stock of ealabashes to contain water, palm oil, and palm wine, all which are suspended from the roof. The baskets and wicker-work plates are made either of reeds or of the rind of a kind of wild rotang, divided inte _ thin strips. The calabashes are hardened by long exposure to smoke, in order to make them more durable. A highly-valued article is the cake of _ tobacco, carefully enveloped in leaves and suspended, _ like the rest of the property, from the roof. Numerous | cotton-bags and cooking-vessels are hung about, or stored away, and on the walls are the bundles of the cuticle of palm-leaves, of which their bongos are woven, ’ The Ishogos are a peaceful tribe,-and more in- dustrious than tribes who live nearer the sea-shore. Very few of them bear scars or signs of hostile encounters. Offensive weapons are not common ; at least they are not carried about on ordinary occasions. —Lsaw very few spears and bows and arrows carried in that way, but swords are more general, and they carry these along with them in their friendly visits 290 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND.. Caap. XV from one village to another. In these respects they differ much from their neighbours the Aponos, who are very warlike. Their villages are surrounded with palm-trees, and they are not sparing of the favourite intoxicating beverage obtained from them; but they do not become, like the Aponos, boisterous and quarrelsome over their cups. They are altogether — milder in character. On the other hand, it must be said to their discredit that they are far more given — than the Aponos to sell their kindred into slavery, — There can be no doubt about this, judging from the — much larger proportion of Ishogos than Aponos met — with in slavery amongst the coast-tribes. This, how- — ever, may be due to the fact that the Ishogos sold into slavery go down the Rembo Ngouyai, and reach the country between Cape Lopez and Fernand Vaz; while most of the Aponos sold reach the coast» by way of Mayomba. In fact, the goods the Aponos get, especially the salt, come from that direction, as far as I could judge from the direction indicated to me by them. The borders of Ishogo-land, near the Apono country, had been visited by the small-pox before my arrival, and indeed were not yet quite free from it. The Ishogos speak the same language as the Apingi, which, as I have already remarked, is quite distinct from the Ashira idiom. The Ishogo people are noted throughout the neigh- bouring tribes for the superior quality and fineness of the bongos, or pieces of grass-cloth, which they manufacture. They are industrious and skilfu weavers. In walking down the main street of Mo: kenga a number of ouandjas, or houses without walls AND SHUTTLE. ISHOGO LOOM Unae. XV. ISHOGO WEAVERS. 291 are seen, each containing four or five looms, with the weavers seated before them weaving the cloth. In the middle of the floor of the ouandja a wood-fire is seen burning, and the weavers, as you pass by, are sure to be seen smoking their pipes and chatting to one another whilst going on with their work. The weavers are all men, and it is men also who stitch the bongos together to make denguis or robes of them; the stitches are not very close together, nor is the thread very fine, but the work is very neat and regular, and the needles are of their own manufacture. The bongos are very often striped, and sometimes made even in check patterns; this is done by their dyeing some of the threads of the warp, or of both warp and woof, with various simple colours; the dyes are all made of decoctions of different kinds of wood, except for black, when a kind of iron ore is used. The _ bongos are employed as money in this part of Africa. _ Although called grass-cloth by me, the material is _ not made of grass, = but of the dalicate and firm cuticle Bof palm-leaflets, stripped off in a dexterous manner _ with the fingers. _ Mokenga is a beautiful village, containing about 160 houses; they were the largest dwellings I had yet seen on the journey. The village was surrounded _ by a dense grove of plantain-trees, many of which had to be supported by poles, on account of the weight of the enormous bunches of plantains they bore. Little groves of lime-trees were scattered every- where, and the limes, like so much golden fruit, looked beautiful amidst the dark foliage that sur- rounded them. Tall, towering palm-trees were _ 4 ; 292 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XV : scattered here and there. Above and behind the village was the dark green forest. The street was the broadest I ever saw in Africa; one part of it was about 100 yards broad, and not a blade ot — grass could be seen in it. The Sycobi were build- r ing their nests everywhere, and made a deafening — noise, for there were thousands and thousands of these little sociable birds. Mokenga, being on the skirts of the interior moun- — tain ranges, its neighbourhood is very varied and — picturesque. The spring from which the villagers draw their water is situated in a most charming spot. — A rill of water, clear and cold, leaps from the lower — part of a precipitous hill, with a fall of about nine ~ feet, into a erystal basin, whence a rivulet brawls ~ down towards the lower land through luxuriant © woodlands. The hill itself and the neighbourhood — of the spring are clothed with forest, as, in fact, is _ the whole country, and the path leads under shade to the cool fountain. I used to go there in | the mornings whilst I was at the village to take a douche-bath. In such places the vegetation of the tropics always shows itself to the best advantage; favoured by the moisture, the glossy: and elegant | foliage of many strange trees and plants assumes its” full development, whilst graceful creepers hang from the branches, and ferns and liliaceous plants grow luxuriantly about the moist margins of the spring. | Not far from Mokenga there was a remarkable | and very large boulder of granite perched by itself — at the top of a hill. It must have been transported there by some external force, but what this was I | | Cuar. XV. GRANITIC BOULDERS—GROOVED ROCKS. 293 cannot undertake to say. I thought it possible that it might have been a true boulder transported by a - glacier, like those so abundant in northern latitudes. _ Although I visited it and examined it closely, I found no traces of grooves upon it. On my way from Mokaba to Yengué, I saw no boulders of quartz or granite. _ My visits to this enormous block of granite were so numerous that they attracted the notice of the natives, and I was not a little surprised, one fine _ morning, to find the village in a state of great ex- citement about the rumour that the boulder was not ‘m the same place as it had always been, and that the Oguizi had moved it. The people dared not ‘mention their suspicions to me; indeed, they were so much alarmed that they fled from me; but they ‘surrounded my men, and, with every paar of fear and superstitious excitement, asked them why I had Moved the stone. It was in vain that my men Ly attempted to laugh them down, and even when some #f them went with the villagers to examine the huge block, it was impossible to make them see that the as ock had not moved; such was the effect their pre- | conceived ideas had upon their vision. ha Whilst I am on the subject of boulders and signs Mf glaciers, I may as well mention that, when cross- f ing the hilly country from Obindji to Ashira-land, “Iny attention was drawn to distinct traces of grooves B on the surface of several of the blocks of granite hich there lie strewed about on the tops and de- ivities of the hills. I am aware how preposterous | it seems to suppose that the same movements of ice —. ah oe i 294 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XY. which have modified the surface of the land in northern countries can have taken place here under the equator, but I think it only proper to relate — what I saw with my own eyes. ; I called three of the elders to my hut, and gave — them each a present, including a red cap apiece. © The people said they would have a dance in the © evening, in order to show me how the Ishogos danced, — I am now quite friendly with them all, and they seem to like me and my people. q June 22nd. We left Mokenga at twenty minutes ] past eleven a.m. Before we started, a number of © women brought us little parcels of ground-nuts to eat on the road; they really seemed sorry to see us Sal Soon after pe the village we begaig an hour on the ae my unshcea gave an altitude of 738 feet. About three or four miles from Mo- kenga we crossed a little stream called Dongon. At | an Ishogo village named Diamba, which we passed | about two o'clock, I saw two heads of the gorilla (male and female) stuck on two poles placed under | the village tree in the middle of the street. In ex- planation of this I may mention here that in almost every Ishogo and Ashango village which I visited | there was a large: tree standing about the middle of | the main street, and near the mbuiti or idol-house of the village. The tree is a kind of Ficus, with large, | thick, and glossy leaves. It is planted as a sapling | when the village is first built, and is considered to bring good luck to the inhabitants as a talisman: | the sapling lives, the villagers consider the omen 4 | Omar. XV. SACRED VILLAGE TREES. 295 good one ; but if it dies they all abandon the place _ and found a new village elsewhere. This tree grows rapidly, and soon forms a conspicuous object, with its _ broad crown yielding a pleasant shade in the middle of the street. Fetiches, similar to those I have de- _ scribed in the account of Rabolo’s village on the Fernand Vaz, are buried at the foot of the tree; and the gorillas’ heads on poles at Diamba were no doubt placed there as some sort of fetich. The tree, ot _ course, is held sacred. An additional’ charm is lent to 4 these village trees by the great number of little social "birds (Sycobius, three species) which resort to them to build their nests amongst the foliage. These charming little birds love ti society of man as well as that of their own species. They associate in these _ trees sometimes in incredible quantities, and the "noise they make with their chirping, chatting, and - fuss in building their nests and feeding their young — is often greater even than that made by the negroes | oh f the village. ‘The villagers at Diamba, who had heard how we had treated the Mokenga people, entreated us to stop al e for the ace but I cians not consent. we ews _. in sli where trees had been felled | for ' plantations. Through one of these breaks I b = two high hills, one called Migoma, and another Pa ig ¥; yur bad led us over Mount Migoma, and from it oF 1a a magnificent view of the country to the south : 296 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XV. and south-east. Ranges of hills, all wooded to the summit, stretched away as far as the eye could reach. By compass, I found the ranges to tend N.W. by _W. and S.E. by E. We passed, in the course of the evening, two other Ishogo villages ; and, at five p.m., fixed our encampment for the night near the foot of — a hill called Mouida, on the banks of a beautiful — stream, called Mabomina. We had travelled about — ten miles since leaving Mokenga. : June 23rd. Our night was not a very tranquil one, © as our Ishogos had to keep watch in turns on account — of the leopards prowling about. I had myself very little sleep, having no inclination to be made a meal | ' of by the hungry animals. At eight a.m. we left the leaf-thatched sheds whiel : we had built for our last night’s shelter. At ten, we | reached the banks of the Odiganga, a picturesque stream, one of the tributaries of the Ngouyai. At | the place to which our path led us the stream was | fordable at this season, the water reaching only to | our hips, but a few yards lower down the stream was — very deep. It is only at certain points that the river © is fordable. During the rains it becomes so deep | and dangerous that the natives have to cross it on | a raft secured by ropes to the trees on either bank. — The Odiganga forms the eastern boundary of the | Ishogo territory, and runs towards the south-west. ; ; 4 There are two Ishogo villages near the right bank, and an Ashango village on the left. The two tribes are curiously intermixed in the Ishogo villages; on one side of the street Ishogos dwell, and on the other side Ashangos; they are peppy, related by mar+— Guar. XV. ARRIVAL AT MAGONGA. 297 _ riage, and thus live in company ; or it may be that the _ yarious clans, which are fast diminishing in numbers, ‘unite together in order to form a large and popv- ees village. After we had forded the Odiganga-——which was by “no means an easy task, owing to the strength of the , current—we reached the village of Magonga. I may here remark that the palletes I have seen in this country never run parallel to, or along the banks of NA - the village generally being near the water. At this Ashango village my Ishogo porters found “many friends and fathers-in-law ; and, although we Ta marched only five miles £0: -day, they pleaded fatigue in order to have an idle day with them. “Mokounga made all sorts of excuses to put a stop to the march; so, much against my will, [ had to order a@halt. The villagers, to propitiate me, brought me S§ a present a goat and some plantains. Bune 24th. I find that old Mokounga, my Ishogo leader, is a man of no influence amongst his country- / men. When I gave him orders to pack up and march this morning, the porters took very little | pace of his directions, and wanted to stay another day. Happily, I had among them a man of more _ power than the leader, named Maduta, whose family is partly Ashango, and who aided me in my 3 Rdeavours to move my party forward. After much 0, we succeeded in leaving the village at nine a.m. he disappointed villagers followed us as we marched ut, and endeavoured to entice some of the porters _ te " f main; they all cursed Maduta, and said that the rivers, but at right angles. to them—one end of r = pee - a ae 298 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XV. they would settle accounts with him if he came back to their village, as he was the cause of the Ibamba’s not remaining with them, and of their not getting beads enough. It required some firmness on our part to keep them all in order; so, as our porters were ready, I ordered Igala to lead the van, gun in ~ hand, and one by one we filed through the street, 1 bringing up the rear. | We had hardly cleared the village when we com- — menced the ascent of a steep hill called Madombo. It was so steep in some places that we had to help ourselves up by the aid of the bushes. In many — parts recently fallen trees lay across the path, and — these had to be climbed over. Thorny climbers and ~ briars tore our clothes, and the porters struggled on, ~ venting curses against the many obstacles that lay in their way. The summit formed an extensive table-land, the mean altitude of which, according to my aneroids, was 1226 feet. We marched over this: elevated ‘plateau for about three miles, and then descended a little, stopping for breakfast on the banks of a rivulet called Mandjao. : Before we resumed our loads, the porters came to | me in a body, and mildly asked me. to give them each a few beads to enable them to purchasg eround- | nuts in the Ashango villages. I told them that I was willing to have given them beads at Magonga, — and I opened my bags and distributed a few amongst { them; but I was not a little surprised immediately | afterwards to find that a mutiny had been resolved upon. They began to complain that I had been more liberal to the Aponos than to them—that I had — oe | oa MUTINY OF ISHOGO PORTERS. 299 - given them a great many things, for they saw _ them; and the chief spokesman, the same man who had been the chief cause of our troubles at the last age had the impudence to say to his comrades, _ “Tf he will not give us more beads, let us leave him.” The whole body then laid down their loads, and said they would return to their homes. This _ was a critical moment; I felt that an energetic step _ was-necessary to put an end to such insubordination. I gave the order to my Commi men to arm, and, in a _ few moments, the resolute fellows stepped forward and levelled their guns at the heads of the offenders. Ttold them to go now, and they would see how many Bpould reach the other side of thé brook alive. The movement had its due effect—they all ‘held out their hh hands and begged to be forgiven. These little muti- nies [ found were all arranged beforehand; they are attempts at extortion, and the rascals in planning i em agree not to proceed to extremities. In a short time they had again taken up their loads, and we marched off at a quick pace; the porters becoming qu ite cheerful, laughing and chattering as they trudged along. In the course of an hour after this, we arrived at a large Ashango village, called Oyégo or Moyégo, poet which we passed without stopping; the in epeiente, who seemed to be more astonished at y boots than at anything else, cried out, “ Look! ¢ has feet like an elephant!” The road all the vay was very hilly; at one part I found the eleva- on 1486 feet, so that the land here was higher than » plateau of Madombo. ta land and the country of the Ashangui. These Njavi 300 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cnar.XV At four p.m. we reached another Ashango village. I was unwilling to accept the hospitality of this place owing to the noise and annoyance caused by the vil- lagers, in fact I felt that my head would not stand it, and so fixed my camp at a short distance from it; erecting as usual slight sheds of poles thatched with — leaves. June 25th, The altitude of my encampment was 1480 feet above the sea-level. The thermometer at six a.m. marked 72° Fahr., and at noon only 73°. In the early morning a thick mist lay over the magnifi- — cent woodlands, and half hid the village and sur-— rounding palm-trees from our view. Ahead of us — awere hills that rose much higher than our present position; we were now at length in the heart of the mountainous country in the interior of Africa. It is very curious that one side of the street of this village is peopled by the Ashango, and the other side by the Njavi tribe. This was the only opportu- nity I had of seeing people of the Njavi tribe; it- appeared that they had been driven westward to this place by the enmity of a powerful tribe, of whom I shall have to speak further on—the Ashangui— whose country les near theirs on the east; for the territory occupied by the Njavi lies between Ashango- were the shyest and most timid negroes I had ever met with. They would never allow me to enter their houses, and were filled with fear. when I merely looked at them. s The streets of all the Ashango villages I have yet seen are less broad than those of the Ishogo villages. - _ Ouar. XV. DIFFICULTIES AND DISCOURAGEMENTS. 301 it ; _ As to the inhabitants, my first impressions were un- : favourable. They brought us no food either for sale _ or presents, and the few men who came to our camp _ spent all the time in tedious speechifying, of which I was by this time heartily sick. My Ishogo men pesan began to show signs of discontent, this time — not against me but against the villagers; they said, _ “Tf there is nothing to eat, let us be off. We do not stop at villages where goats are not given to - the Oguizi!” The rascals knew very well that the ‘goats would be given to them to eat. I fed my : porters well, for many were induced to come from hearing the stories told by the Aponos of the great number of goats they had eaten while with me. In truth it is enough to weary a man out. It is a tremendous task that I have undertaken. The ordi- nary difficulties of the way, the toilsome marches, the night watches, the crossing of rivers, the great heat, are as nothing compared with the obstacles and annoy- ances which these capricious villagers throw in our vay. I begin to dread the sight of an inhabited place. Ei ther the panic-stricken people fly from me, or remain ae me by their insatiable curiosity, fickleness, } vr reediness, and intolerable din. Nevertheless [ am ob! bliged to do all I can think of to conciliate them, | cannot do without them; it being impossible ‘to travel without guides through this wilderness of | ores s where the paths are so intricate; besides, we jald not make our appearance in the villages with- ut some one to take us there and say a good word rus. The villagers are frightened enough of us it is, eeeveh we come with their friends. [am 302 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cxap. XV forced to appear good-tempered when, at the same time, I am wishing them all at the bottom of the sea. They surround my hut, hallooing and shouting; as soon as I make my appearance they run away. — When I re-enter my hut, they all come back again © and recommence shouting for me. During the few ~ days I remain in a village I go about from house to ~ house, distributing beads to the women, coaxing the © . children, and allaying by-smooth speeches the fears — and prejudices of the men. I sit by their fire-— side. If they are eating, I ask them for some of their food and taste it—this always pleases them vastly. And after all these exertions to win their favour and friendship, I never knew for certain, when we entered a village, whether we might not be received with a shower of poisoned arrows. June 26th. There was again a thick mist this morn ing, lasting from sunrise to nine a.m. We had sue ceeded in buying two goats at this frightened village. As I had been unable to take meridian altitudes of stars at Magonga, I hoped to have done so here: but the state of the weather unfortunately prevented my doing so. Having no further inducement to stay, and a deputation from the next village, called Niembouai, having arrived to invite us there, I was resolved t resume the march early this morning. When, how ever, we were getting our loads ready, the head man Mokounga and two of the porters were missing having sneaked away to feast and drink in compan with. their friends in the village. I fairly lost tempe over these people, and went into the village deter a Cuar. XV. RECEPTION AT NIEMBOUAL 303 . mined to use force, if necessary, to drag them away. I found one of them in a hut, seated ie the side of the fire, with a luge pot of plantains nearly ready for r _ breakfast. On his refusing to come I knocked him _ over with the butt-end of my rifle. An energetic demonstration of this kind never fails; but one is obliged to be sparing of such displays, as they tend to have the effect of frightening everybody away for good. The man in falling knocked over the pot of boiling plantains; so there was a great hubbub, which r Toused the whole village, the woman loudly cursing the man for being the cause of her pot being broken. X Mokounga came forth from his hiding-place, begging forgiveness in the most abject manner ; and as I drove the fellows to the camp, the chief came along the street beating his kendo to allay my wrath, and I began to regret my Apono porters. % pat length we were again en route. For several es We continued to ascend; and whenever we could bt ain a view through becels in the forest we saw igher ground towards the east and south-east. Huge icks of ferruginous sandstone bordered the line of 1 route. Our entry into Niembouai was a pleasant affair compared with our reception at most of the he elders of Niembouai having been at Mokenga vhile I was there ; and who, having returned before , , had eopardd the inhabitants. There was no y mess displayed, nor were there any attempts to n paway. The best house in the village had*been pared for me. It belonged to the elder who had tu t us at Mokenga, and who now claimed me as his a - » (ag other villages. This was chiefly owing to one of s ye 4 ™ -~ * : é hs 7 a f “ 1 304 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XV, guest, and, according to the custom of the country, no one disputed his claim. | Before we entered the village, our Ishogo porters, — with the usual greediness of these negroes, resolved — to make halt and eat our only remaining goat; their — only motive being to avoid being required to share ~ the meal with their relatives in Niembouai. Africans — are most confirmed gluttons; and, although used to — their displays of voracity, I was annoyed at the © conduct of my porters on this occasion, for nothing ~ would do but we must halt by the roadside, kill the — goat, and make a fire, although there was no water near the place. | June 27th. The king of Niembouai, like most of | the other monarchs of these regions, did not show himself on my arrival—he was absent until about noon to-day. I have been told that the reason why the chiefs keep away from the villages until I have been in them some time is, that they have a notion that I bring with me a whirlwind which may do them some great harm; so they wait until it has hae time to blow away from the village before they make their appearance. f Presents and food for sale came in cates and we were well supplied to-day. Iwas much pleased at the respectful and quiet behaviour of the people. Th Niembouaians must have heard of my dislike o impertinent curiosity and noise, and are trying thei best to be better behaved than other people. How= | ever’ this might be, I resolved to reward their go od conduct by ekabitine to them some of the wonders I had brought with me. I informed the elders ¢ 4 ¥ - : Cuar. XV. ENTERTAINMENT TO THE NATIVES. 305 my intention, and the people came in great numbers and formed a circle round me. The musical box was brought out, wound up, and set playing. The y - people were mute with amazement ; at first they did . not dare to look at the musical ec afterwards they looked from me to the box and from the box to me, evidently convinced that there was some communica- bi fon between me and it. Then I went away into ee forest, the musical box still continuing to play. “When I came back there was ‘still the same mute amazement. The box was still playing, and the pen seemed to be spell-bound, not one could utter a word. When I saw that the tunes were played | “out, I shouted out as loud as I could “Stop!” and the silence that ensued seemed to surprise them as much as the music had done before. Then taking my revolver I fired several times, and my men fired of f their guns. Whereupon with one accord the Bian gcc cried out, “Truly the Spirit has come a among us!” | So soon as this wild excitement had somewhat sub- ided, the accordion was brought out. With this ins sirument I made a noise, for I do not know how io play upon it. The same silence followed; and when now and then I played the high notes in a at Serilons manner, the people all ‘ised their arms | in a state of nervous excitement; indeed I could not “understand the strong effect the instrument had upon their nerves. The king, during the performances, “Was continually beating his kendo, and speaking to the spirits of his ancestors. I had not exhibited these ‘Marvels at any village since I left Mdyolo ‘The > x SY 7F- - yet seen any article of civilized manufacture, except — - invocations. Though he had promised to take m “ie 4 ‘ ‘ ‘ ; 306 FROM ISHOGO. TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XV. astonishment, the childish wonder and mystification — of these primitive people, who had probably never P| beads and articles of brass, may easily be imagined. Beer-bottles are to be seen now and then in the ~ interior, and it is astonishing how far mland they have penetrated. They are held in very high estima- tion by the chiefs, who covet nothing so much as a black bottle to hang by their side, and contain their palm wine; they consider the bottle far superior to the native ealauhsh for this purpose; no doubt, be- cause it comes from a foreign country. If any of the wives or slaves of a chief have the misfortune to break a bottle, there is a fearful row. The per formances had an exceedingly good effect on the — minds of the people with respect to the feelings with | which they regarded us. In return I asked the king to let me see his alumbi-house, to which he went every day, both in the morning and also @ little before dark. In the evening he always lighted a fire, then beat his kendo, and spoke to the spirit of his ancestors. As the little hut was close to my lodging, I could hear what was going on; and could — now and then distinguish my own name in i a nd into his alumbi-house, he always put off doing 80 | with one excuse or other. . The king was blessed with numerous wives, and one of them, the queen (kondé, or head wife) was a nice-looking young girl, not more than seventeen or eighteen years of age. She was not shy, a8 most of the wives of chiefs were in the countries, Cuap. XV. PREJUDICES OF THE COMMI MEN. 307 we had lately passed through; she cooked for me and gave plantains to my men. To gratify her, I made her a present of a goat—at least, | was going to do so, but Mokounga laughed heartily at the idea. “ Do ~ you not know,” says he, “that the Ashango and _ Ishogo do not allow their women to eat goats?” This, indeed, was the fact, although I had not par- ticularly noticed it in my passage through the _ villages. Women or girls are not allowed to eat the : flesh of goats or fowls. I suppose they are prohi- 4 bited because the men wish to reserve such scarce articles of food for themselves. It is only amongst 5 ; the Commi and Mpongwé that this prohibition - does not exist or has been abolished. I withheld _ my intended present, and gave the young lady a _ string of my best beads instead. _ To-day I gave a good lecture to my Commi boys, especially to Macondai. These negroes of the coast have an extraordinary contempt for the negroes of | the interior, and I had noticed a growing disposition ‘in them, as we marched eastward, to insult even the elders and chiefs of the villages we passed through. — Some days ago I observed Macondai, whilst standing | near an Ishogo man, turn aside from him with an expression of disgust and spit on the ground; and } to day, when one of the king’s nephews took a seat 4 by his side, he got up and said he must get out of the way of that slave, he stank so. Although this s spoken in the Commi language, the Ashango man understood it and was very angry, and un- pleasant consequences might have ensued if I had not interfered; so I called Macondai aside and gave 308 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuar, XV. him a sound scolding. The rest of my Commi companions took the same view of the matter as Macondai. They said they were superior to these Ashangos; they were not bushmen nor slaves (mean- ing that the Ashangos are sent to the sea-shore to — be sold); they did not file their teeth nor rub them- — selves over with powder ; and more to the same effect. — I told them they were all of the same race, and that there was a time when their own tribe, the Commi, sold their fellows into slavery. Of course my men obeyed me, and abstained afterwards from openly ~ showing contempt for the chiefs; but my arguments — did not convince them that the Ashangos had the — same natural rights as they had themselves. I often — heard them say, “ How is it possible that Chaillie can — think us to be of the same blood as these slaves?” = We had a drizzling rain from half-past six p.m. “y a lasting all night. 4 June 28th. The ground is soaked after so many hours of steady rain, and this is in the middle of the dry season. ‘There is evidently no sharp dis- | tinction between the seasons in these high inland i regions. . I was told to-day, and it was repeated to me in — every place afterwards, that there is a tribe called , Ashangui, very numerous, and clever workers in rr | who live a few days’ march further on towards the — east, on the banks of a large river. This river m ster either be the Congo or some unknown stream flowing towards the great river. It is remarkable that , | people in most of the Ashango villages were very — anxious to get gunpowder from me; the porters — Guar. XV. THE ASHANGUI TRIBE. 309 ; wanted to be paid partly in powder, and many of the villagers were provided with a little measure made of a hollowed gourd expressly for the purpose of _ measuring the powder that they received from me _ in payment of food and so forth. I wondered at first why they were so anxious to obtain gunpowder, 4 as they had no guns and were even afraid of handling one; so I asked them what they wanted to do with 4 the Be eder they got from me, as they had no guns. They replied that a tribe called Ashangui, living “beyond the Njavi and Abombo, bought it and gave them iron for it; that all the iron they had came from there, that there was a good deal of iron “i the land ;” that all the anvils came from there, and ‘that their swords, spears, and arrow-heads, in fact, | all their edged implements, were made of iron bought from that country. The iron from the West Coast sole by the trades does not reach so far inland as this place. We must conclude, rom their buying the powder, that the Ashangui are in possession of guns, which they obtain from traders on the Congo. From Nierabouai eastward I found beads were not un- common, and these must have been obtained by way of the Congo, and through the Ashangui; in act, all the natives told me they came up the large ‘ er: they get also copper from Europe. I inquired out the Sapadi, or people with cloven feet—a thical race, believed in by all negroes, and, accord- Beto the reports of Ashango slaves on the coast, living in this country—but, as I had expected, their 310 FROM ISHOGO TO ASHANGO-LAND. Cuap. XV. country was now said to be a long way further on, — lt is very likely that these stories about the Sapadi — originate in accounts of the Obongos or hairy dwarfs, who are really inhabitants of Ashango-land, as We — shall presently see. { “i ’ ¢ i 7 te ° : “y * “al 4 ray v ‘ "tv sz o t . “a. Jigs . 4 ‘ i. : vt: Gael ““ - 4 a ‘A, ; " i Pat i im ail ; - re ey ai iat ea Sa ae Pe eae rt, ee ee CHAPTER XVL ASHANGO-LAND. : _ Cloudy Skies of Ashango-land—Grand Palaver—Ishogo Porters dism‘ssed A —The Village Idol—Religious Rites—Visit to an Obongo Village— . - Abodes and Habits of the Dwarf Race—Measurements of their Height ‘ —River Ouano—Singular Ferry—Mount Mogiama—Its Altitude— | Village of Mongon, its Latitude, Longitude, and Height above the Sea- level—Village of Niembouai Olomba—lIts picturesque Site—Bashi- _kouay Ants—Ascend Mount Birogou Bouanga—Its Altitude—More . Troubles—Robbed by the Ashango Porters—Summary Measures— Resume our March—Arrive at Mobana—Departure of a Bride—Arrival at Mouaou Kombo. June 29th. The sky in this elevated region is almost _ constantly clouded or hazy. All day yesterday it was either clouded or overspread with a thick haze; the sun was dimly seen only for a few minutes about | visible long enough to enable me to take lunar obser- | vations. To-day it is the same, much to my annoy- seen here was quite remarkable, and the fact speaks well for the healthiness of the climate or the absence ‘of wars and deaths on account of witchcraft. The people here, and also among the Ishogos, seemed to have more respect for old men than in other tribes, Poe 1 ri ot) eve se four o’clock, and at night the moon did not remain - 312 ASHANGO-LAND. Cusp. XVE It required a long explanation by Maduta and Mo- kounga to convince the wise men that I had not come to their country to buy slaves and ivory, but simply to travel from one tribe to another. They had to recount as usual all the stages of my progress and enumerate the different chiefs who had helped me on from tribe to tribe. Maduta is related to some of the villagers by marriage, and this favoured our arrangements ; he dwelt particularly on the many offers I had had, on the way, to stay at villages, and how I had refused them in order to have more presents to give away to the good people of Niem- bouai. This announcement was received with tre- mendous cheers, and cries of “Rovano!” (that is so). They on their part, he said, must outdo the ~ other places in the magnitude of the presents of food — they had to make me. He finished a long rigmarole, — which took him about an hour to deliver, by saying that the Ishogos had now fulfilled their duty in — bringing me safely to Ashango-land, and that the — duty, or, as their language expressed it, the “ shame ” (or point of honour) remained with the Niembouai — people to carry me on a stage further. | The Ashangos unanimously shouted “ We have shame, we will pass the Oguizi on.” Speeches then — set in on their side, and the palaver broke up, to the — satisfaction of all parties, after three hours’ duration. — After this business was over I finished the payment of the Ishogo porters, by distributing amongst them the parting presents. I then gave them a goat for food on the way, and they set off to march back to” their homes, not without bidding me a kind good- ‘ _ Caap. XVI. THE VILLAGE IDOL. 313 q bye. Nothing pleases these people so much as these parting presents, as they are unexpected. This evening I went to see the village idol, or mbuiti (the patron saint as it may be called), and to witness a great ceremony in the mbuiti-house. As 1 with the Aviia and other tribes, the idol was a mon- _ strous and indecent representation of a female figure ‘, in wood; I had remarked that the further I travelled _ towards the interior, the coarser these wooden idols _ were, and the more roughly they were sculptured. _ This idol ways kept at the end of a long, narrow, and low hut, forty or fifty feet long and ten feet broad, ill was painted in red, pr and black Wie B. B p kaw Te ee en Unap. XIX. RECEPTION AT MAYOLO. 389 disease, we established our olakos or sheds outside the village. | Old Mayolo was so much impressed with the account of our affray with the Mouaou people and our escape from their poisoned arrows, killing at the same time so many of them—for, as I have said be- fore, my men exaggerated more and more at every place the number we had slain—that he firmly be- heved some potent talisman had protected us in the ficht. The morning after our arrival he came into my shed in a mysterious manner, looking about to see that no one was near us, and said, ‘“ Chaillie, you are an Oguizi, and I know you can make mondahs, although you say you do not. How could the arrows of the Ashango glide off your body without hurting you, if you had not a war fetich on you? and how could you kill so many without any of your men being killed? I cannot understand this, for I know that the Ashangos are great warriors. If you love me, make one of these great war mondahs for me, that I and my people may go into the fight without being hurt, and that everybody may be made afraid of Mayolo.” The earnestness of manner and excitement of the old man were quite ludicrous. I entirely failed to persuade him that I had no such mondah, and still more incredulous was he when I said that our safety was due to a kind Providence who had watched over us. He left me at last dissatisfied, and questioned my men; Igala was quite ready to make and sell to him any amount of fetiches. [had an opportunity during my stay in Mayolo of observing how the curious law of inheritance existing 390 JOURNEY TO THE COAST. Cuap. XIX. amongst these tribes is carried out. Oshoumouna, the nephew and heir of Mayolo, had died of small- pox since my departure from Mayolo for the interior, leaving two wives—one young and good-looking, the other old and ugly. These wives of Oshou- mouna I knew very well, for I had given one of them a coat for her husband on my former visit, and had often bought plantains of the other. To my surprise I found one of them now married to Mayolo and looking quite joyous, dressed in her best; the other was married to Ikala, Oshoumouna’s younger brother. According to my notions of African law, Ikala ought to have inherited all the property of his deceased brother, including the pick of the wives. I asked why this had not taken place, and was told that it is the elder brother who inherits the property of his younger brothers in the event of their decease, and not vice versd. If Ikala had died first, Oshoumouna would have taken his wives and all the rest of his property, but, as the case stood, Oshoumouna having no elder brother, his uncle Mayolo had the right of dividing the property as he thought fit; but with the understanding that some of the wives must be given to the younger brother. — My Commi men and several of the Otando people criticised rather sharply old Mayolo’s appropriation { of the pretty wife; they thought he was greedy in wanting all the med things for himself. . I was much amused one evening at Mayolo, whilst - my men and a number of villagers were lying about _ the fires near our encampment, by a story or parable bee tae | © a Ouap. XIX. STORY OF AKENDA MBANI 391 related by a very talkative old fellow who seemed to be the wag of the village. It was as follows :— AKENDA MBANI. Redjioua had -a daughter called Arondo, and she was very beautiful. Redjioua said, “ A man may give me slaves, goods, or ivory to marry my daughter, but he will not get her; I want only a man that will agree that when Arondo falls ill, he will fall ill also, and that when Arondo dies, he will die also.”. Time went on; and, as people knew this, no one came to ask Arondo in marriage; but, one day, a man called Akenda Mbani (“never goes twice to the same place”) came, and he said to Red- jioua, “I come to marry Arondo, your daughter ; I come, because I will agree that when Arondo dies, I will die also.” So Akenda Mbani married Arondo. Akenda Mbani was a great hunter, and, after he had married Arondo, he went hunting, and killed two wild boars. On his return, he said, “I have killed two boars, and bring you one.” Red- jioua said, “Go and fetch the other.” Akenda - _Mbani said, “ My father gave me a nconi (a law) that I must never go twice to the same place.” Another day he went hunting again, and killed two antelopes; on his return, he said to Redjioua, “Father, I have killed two kambi (antelopes), I bring you one.” The king answered, “ Please, my son-in-law, go and fetch the other.” He answered, “ You know I cannot go twice to the same place.” Another time he went hunting again, and killed 392 JOURNEY TO THE COAST. CHap. XIX. two bongos (a kind of antelope). ‘Then Redjioua, who saw that all the other animals were being lost, said, “Please, my son-in-law, show the people the place where the other bongo is.” Akenda Mbani replied, “Tf I do so I am afraid I shall die.” . In the evening of the same day, a canoe from the Oroungou country came with goods, and remained on the river side. Akenda Mbani said to his wife Arondo, “Let us go and meet the Oroungous.” They saw them, and then took a box full of goods and then went back to their own house. The people of the village traded with the Oroungous; and, when the Oroungous wanted to go back, they came to Akenda Mbani, and he trusted them ten slaves, and gave them a present of two goats, and many bunches of plantains, mats, and fowls; then the Oroungous left. Months went on; but, one day, Arondo said to her husband, “ We have never opened the box that ~ eame with the Oroungous. Let us see what there is in it.” They opened it, and saw cloth; then Arondo said, “ Husband, cut me two fathoms of it, for I like it.” Then they left the room; then Arondo seated herself on the bed, and Akenda Mbani on a stool, when suddenly Arondo said, “Husband, I begin to — have a headache.” Akenda Mbani said, “Ah, ah, — Arondo, do you want me to die?” and he looked © Arondo steadily in the face. He tied a bandage ~ round her head, and did the same to his own. Arondo began to cry as her headache became worse; and, when the people of the village heard her ery, — they came all round her. Redjioua came, and said, — “Do not ery my daughter; you will not die.” Then — CHap. XIX. STORY OF AKENDA MBANI. 393 Arondo said, “ Father, why do you say I shall not die? for, if you fear death, you may be sure it will come.”* She had hardly said these words than she expired. Then all the people mourned, and Redjioua said, “ Now my eauaniet, 7 is dead, Akenda Mbani must die also.” The place where people are buried is called Diimai ; the villagers went there and dug a place for the two corpses, which were buried together. Redjioua had a slave buried with Arondo, besides a tusk of an elephant, rings, mats, plates, and the bed on which Akenda Mbani auch Arondo slept; the cutlass, the hunting bag, and the spear of Akenda Mbani were also buried. The people then said, “ Let us cover the things with sand, and make a little mound. When Agambouai (the mouth-piece—the speaker of the village) heard of this, he said to Redjioua, “There are leopards here.” Then Redyjioua said, “Do not have a mound over my child’s burial-place, for fear that the leopards might come and scratch the ground and eat the corpse of my child.” Then the people said, “Let us then dig a deeper hole,” and they took away Arondo and Akenda Mbani, and placed both on stools, and then dug and dug, and put back the things that were to be buried with Arondo, and then laid her in her place. Then they came to Akenda Mbani, who then awoke and said, “T never go twice to the same place; you put me in the tomb and you took me away from it, though all of you knew that I never go to the same place * When an African is ill, his friends consider it will cause his death to say he will die. | p29 394 JOURNEY TO THE COAST. Cuap. XIX. again.” When Redjioua heard of this he became very angry, and said, “You knew that Akenda Mbani never goes twice to the same place; why did you remove him?” Then he ordered the people to catch Agambouai, and cut his head off. MORAL. Formerly it was the custom with married people that when the woman died the man should die also, and wce versd. But since the time of Akenda Mbani, the custom is altered, and the husband or the wife no longer die with their partners. We left Mayolo at daylight on the 16th of August, my men being all heavily-laden with plantains, for we could not prevail upon any of the Otando people to accompany us, and help in carrying our loads. — I felt quite grieved when even the good Mayolo—to whom I had given so many presents, and with whom I had remained so long—refused to accompany mg outside the village. As we left, sheet-lightning was — playing through the dark clouds which hung over the mountains of Ashango-land. On the fourth day of our toilsome march over the rugged hills and through the dark forests of the — mountain range which divides Ashira from Otando- — land, we arrived in the afternoon at the first planta- — tions of the Ashira Ngozai people. Before we saw — the cultivated places we heard the axes ringing — through the forests, showing that the natives were hard at work felling trees for new plantations; this ; being the time of the year—the height of the dry — Cuap. XIX. WE AVOID OLENDA. 399 season—when such work is done, the dry weather being favourable to the burning of the felled trees. Planting begins a few days after the trees have been burnt, with the first rains. My men had by this time eaten all their stock of plantains, and we were beginning to suffer from the want of food. We did not .know how the Ashira people would receive us, after the very unsatisfactory way in which Mintcho and his party had parted from us at Mayolo. I thought it best therefore to avoid meeting with them if it were possible. , We helped ourselves to a few plantains from the trees, sufficient for our present wants, and marched on. Passing the place where we had left Macondai ill of the small-pox, we continued our march, and just before nightfall reached the Olenda slave-village which I described in the ac- . count of our eastward journey. This I was deter- mined to pass without stopping or having any deal- ings with the people; so, ordering my men to have their guns in readiness if any attempt should be made to stop us, we marched on, the people shouting after us as soon as they knew who we were. We got free of the village at last, and pushed on for the banks of the Ovigui. . We were all exhausted with fatigue, and some of my men wanted to lie down and sleep by the roadside. I encouraged them, however, to keep up, and at last we reached the river side. It was then quite dark; we made a fire, roasted our plantains for supper, and then lay down to sleep. Rising at the first peep of day, after a restless night, I was surprised to find the Ovigui quite low, and easily fordable. The stream, which had been so 396 _ JOURNEY TO THE COAST. Cuar. XIX formidable to cross in the rainy season, was now reduced to a mere shallow brook, with water reaching only to the knee. We crossed it, and entered upon the open prairie before it was yet quite light. I had half a mind to proceed straight to Olenda and, taking the inhabitants unawares, to seize some of the _ principal thieves of my property; but on second thoughts I judged it best to avoid the place alto- gether, and cross the prairie to the village of my friend Angouka. In ovr march we passed near to the deserted village of my old enemy Mpoto, who died of the small-pox during those terrible days of February and March. My men looked upon the abandoned cluster of huts as a place accursed, and took care to give it a wide berth in passing. All the Ashira people whom we had seen since leaving the slave-plantation the previous evening had - fled from us at the first sight, so that we held no communication with any one till Angouka’s men came to meetus. We had fired guns on approaching the village, and this was answered by a number of the chief’s people coming out of the grove which surrounds the place, armed to the teeth, to see who it was that was coming. When they recognised us they could scarcely contain their joy. We were led — amid shouts of welcome to the house which Angouka ~ had built for me when he expected me to stay with him on my outward march. Angouka has now a — feud with the Ademba clan (Olenda’s) of his tribe; — he hates them most bitterly; he is a harsh-tempered — man, but has acted in the most loyal and friendly — way towards me, so that I cannot help liking him, “a Cap. XIX. SOJOURN AT ANGOUKA’S VILLAGE. 397 We remained fourteen days at Angouka’s place. The day after my arrival I was laid up with a severe attack of fever, the effect probably of the weeks of toil, anxiety, and privation I had undergone since the disastrous day at Mouaou Kombo. The fever yielded on the fourth day to the frequent and large doses of quinine which I took, but it left me so weak that I was unable to walk far for several days after- wards. The people of Olenda were all this time in great fear lest I should take vengeance on them for their misdeeds; indeed, after my recovery, Angouka made a proposition to me to join my men in burning the village. This I declined, and preferred to lay the whole case before my staunch and powerful old friend Quengueza, who would, I was sure, punish the tricky knaves much more effectually than I should, if he thought it was necessary. In the end, the leading men of Olenda sent to offer to compound for their sins by giving me slaves, and asked how many I should be satisfied with. This offer of course I refused to listen to. | We left Angouka’s on the 10th of September, the first hour of our march being through the magni- ficent groves of plantain-trees, which this industrious and energetic old chief has established near his vil- lage. Continuing our journey, we came to a cluster of abandoned olakos which had been tenanted by Bakalai. The place must have been abandoned in hot haste, for mosquito-nets had been left hanging under the sheds, and on raising one of them I was struck with horror to see the skeleton of a man lying under it. On the road, in many places, we saw human skulls 398 JOURNEY TO THE COAST. Cuap. XIX, and bones, sad evidence of the ravages of the plague, and showing how many had died in the forest on their march from one place to another, their bones gnawed and scattered by prowling hyenas and leopards. We missed the path during the journey, and were guided only by knowing that we were going in the right direction for the Ofoubou by the compass; finally, we reached the banks of this river, but ata point much lower down than the village of Galipadi. Whilst at Angouka’s, we had received a message from Quengueza, saying that, when his people came back from Goumbi, he would send some of them to me. _ He was staying on the banks of this river cutting ebony and deciding palavers amongst the Bakalai, _and we now endeavoured to make our arrival known to him, by marching along the banks and firing our guns. At length our signals were heard: we saw a canoe approach the place where we stood, and on its approach recognised Nchéyouélai, one of the king’s principal slaves. The water of this river was very low; we had to go some distance before arriving at Quengueza’s encampment. On reaching it we were received with a most hearty welcome; the loyal old chief hugged me to his breast, and Lam sure I reci- procated the joy he felt at our meeting. He beat his kendo, and, in a kind. of solemn chant, thanked the spirits of his ancestors for my safe arrival. Sholomba of my own village was here, and some other negroes whom I knew. Nothing could be done — until they had heard the story of our adventures. — My men did not wait for me to tell the tale; but — began their own story. As they proceeded, they — Onap. XIX. SORROWS OF KING QUENGUEZA. 399 waxed warmer and warmer, rising and gesticulating to show how they surrounded the enemy, and how they slew them all, one after another. The more the narrators exaggerated, the more they were ap- plauded by the other men, until all with one accord shouted, ‘“ We have slain 150 of our enemies!” This story Quengueza would not believe, and said he would not be satisfied until he had heard the whole account from my own mouth; “for,” added he, “I have heard from the Ashira the tale of the 150.dead men, and I did not believe them.” So all of.them assembled round me, and I gave them a faithful ac- count of the whole affair. They all listened very attentively, and at the most stirring parts of the nar- rative, when I described our turning in the forest path and facing the crowd of enraged warriors, they clasped their hands and cried out, “ You are men! you are men !” In return, Quengueza narrated to me the events that had happened since his parting from me at Olenda. ‘It was a most sorrowful story. The eviva, or * small-pox, broke out at Goumbi whilst Quengueza was still at Olenda, and his departure was hastened by the news brought to him of the plague. It had caused fearful havoc; relatives, wives, slaves, all had caught the infection and nearly all had died. Goumbi was obliged to be forsaken. For many weeks the old chief, with the relics of his clan, lived in tempo- rary abodes or olakos on the opposite side of the river. Quengueza believed that if he had not re- turned home at the time he did, his beloved son Kombé would also have died. The old man was 400 JOURNEY TO THE COAST. Cuap. XIX. greatly affected at the remembrance of his losses and the death of so many that were dear to him; and I could not help feeling sympathy for him. “The Bakalai,” said he, “are all gone; the Rembo people are all gone; my beloved Monbon (his head slave) is dead; I am alone in the world.” It appeared that he had not even entered Goumbi since he left me at Olenda; but, finding the plague raging there on his return, he had established his home on the opposite bank of the river, and his nephews, who had accom- panied him and me to Ashira-land, together with most of his men, had died. I looked with sadness on his noble figure, with his hoary head whitened by years and bowed down with the remembrance of his troubles, and I grieved for him from the bottom of my heart. He was like an old oak of the forest left standing alone, after all its companions had been overthrown by the storm. We spent the evening by the side of the fires of our encampment, Quengueza and myself side by side, talking over our troubles, and my men telling the story of their adventures to their Rembo comrades, this time in more moderate terms. _ We spent several days at Quengueza’s encamp- ment. I had great difficulty during this time in combating a tendency to sleepiness and lethargy, which had come over me since we had arrived safely amongst our friends. We all suffered much from hunger in the encampment, as food was scarce in this depopulated country. At length, news came that a vessel had arrived off the mouth of the Fer- nand Vaz, and I was seized with an uncontrollable — desire to get away at once to the sea-shore. Cuar. XIX. DEVASTATIONS OF THE PLAGUE. AN) The canoes were not able to take the whole of our party at once, including Quengueza’s wives, ebony, and slaves; so we agreed that I should go first and wait for him at Goumbi. When we departed, the. old chief told me to call at Obindji’s town to bid good . bye to Njambai, the present chief; Obindji being no more, for he was one of the victims of the plague. We glided down the now placid waters of the Ovenga, passing the many Bakalai villages; the numerous abandoned houses bore sorrowful witness of the devastations of the fearful scourge that had swept over this part of the country. We slept at night on the banks of the river, and the next morning passed by the ruins of Goumbi; no longer the flourishing well-peopled village it used to be, but a mere crowd of half-ruined, burnt, and deserted houses. Quengueza’s new settlement was a little further down the river, and the place was called Sangatanga. Almost every one we met bore traces on his or her face of the ravages of the small-pox; and there was not one who had not lost a near relative during these unhappy times. In fact, the Abouya clan of the Commi is almost destroyed; in a few years there will be nothing left of this people, once the most im- portant clan of the Rembo. . I visited Goumbi after my arrival at Sangatanga. The aspect of the place filled my heart with sadness; even the gentle breeze whispering through the plan- tain groves seemed to me a mournful sound. I looked : for the house of my good old friend Adouma, who | on my former journey took me to the Apingi country ; : —T =. = ed 402 JOURNEY ‘TO THE COAST. Onap. XIX, nothing was left of it but a few poles, and it was the same with the habitations of many other negroes who had formerly been good friends to me; the owners were dead, and their houses were in ruins. The little fetich-houses in their neighbourhood re- mained standing, with their talismanic creepers grow- ing round them, but there was no one to take care of them ; I took the opportunity to lecture the negroes who were with me, on the folly of believing in these fetiches, which they might see had no power to avert the calamity that had overtaken their owners. Soon after this, Quengueza himself arrived with all his followers, in their canoes. Many of the survivors of his clan had been trying to make him suspect witchcraft as being at the bottom of the misfortunes that had befallen him, and were crying out for the pona ogang’a to sacrifice more victims and still fur- ther reduce the numbers of the people. But the old man would not listen to these miserable croakers. I was glad to see him resist all their appeals; he said there was no witchcraft in this plague, but it was a “wind sent by Aniambié (God).” “ Hnough people had died, ” he continued, “and we must not kill any more.’ The old chief seemed to have lost baa completely, and was thinking of leaving his country for good. “Tf I was a young man,” he said, “I would go with you to the white man’s country; and even old as I am, if your country was not so far off, [ would go with you. If it was no further than the Mpongwé country (the Gaboon), or Fernando Po”—for he — Cnap. XIX. RETURN TO PLATEAU. 408 had heard of this place, although he had a very indis- tinct notion where it was—“ I would leave the Rembo and go and live with you. You have escaped the plague and the arrows of the Ashangos; you will reach your land, but remember that your old friend will always think of you.” When I finally bade him adieu, he tried to make me promise to come back and stay with him. “Come again,” he said, “and go no more into the bush; and when you come bring me a big bell, a sword with a silver handle that will not rust, and two chests, one of brass and another of ebony, for I want to see how you work the wood that we send to you.” We arrived at my own place, “ Plateau,” on the 21st of September. It is impossible to describe the joy which the people showed on seeing us all come back in safety, for, with the exception of Igala’s wound in the leg which was still inflamed, discharg- ing sometimes a good deal of matter, none of my Commi boys was the worse for the journey they had accomplished. In the evening of the day of our arrival, as I was taking a solitary walk over the open prairie towards the sea, the stster of Igala came to speak to me. With tears coursing down her cheeks, she said, “White man! with a good heart you have taken care of our people. You did not let them die of the plague. On the day of fight you stood by them. No wonder that we love you; you are as one of our- selves; you do not drive us away from you.” This ‘unaffected demonstration of gratitude, I must say, y . % 404 JOURNEY TO THE COAST. Onap. XIX. made me fecl well rewarded for all the care I had taken of my loyal Commi boys. With the exception of the little outburst at Niembouai of Mouitchi and Ra- pelina—whom we must excuse as having been slaves all their lives and knowing no better, indeed they were afterwards ashamed of their misconduct—I am | proud and grateful to think of the fidelity, honesty, steadiness, and pluck displayed throughout the journey, by these sharers of my labours. I need scarcely say that I felt also proud and glad that I was able to bring back all my men, with the exception of Retonda, who died of disease, safe and sound to their families aud friends. They had shown so much confidence in me, in volunteering to accompany me on the expe- dition, which they were told would be likely to occupy two or three years, that 1t was a source of pride to me to be able to show the Commi people that their confidence had not been misplaced. The vessel at the mouth of the river was the Maranee, Captain Pitts, and was loading for London. I had lost nearly all my property in the disastrous fight from Ashango-land, and the house and store which I had built at “ Plateau” I had made a present of to the American missionaries of the Gaboon, who wished to establish there a native Christian teacher. — I had, therefore, neither money nor property; but Captain Pitts kindly consented to take me as passen- ger. We set sail six days after my arrival. | And thus I quitted the shores of Western Equa- ; torial Africa with the blessings and good wishes of 4 Omar. XIX. DEPARTURE FOR ENGLAND. 405 its inhabitants, whose character displays so curious a - mixture of evil qualities and virtues of no mean order. _ Whether I shall ever return to the land where I have laboured so hard in endeavouring to extend the bounds of our knowledge, is doubtful ; but I shall hear a kindly remembrance of the courte and its inhabitants as long as I live. CHAPTER XxX. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY AND CLIMATE. Great Forest of Equatorial Africa—Scanty population—Scarcity or absence of large African animals—Hilly ranges—River systems—The Ogobai —French exploring expeditions—Amount of rain—Seasons—Rainy climate of Central Equatorial Africa—Temperature—Heat of the sun’s rays—OCoolness of the forest shades. EQuatToriIaL Africa from the western coast, as far as I have been, is covered with an almost impenetrable jungle. This jungle begins where the sea ceases to beat its continual waves, and how much further this woody belt extends, further explorations alone will be able to show. From my furthest point it extended eastward as far as my eyes could reach; i may, however, say that, near the banks of a large river running from a north-east direction towards the south-west, prairie lands were to be seen, accord- - Ing to the accounts the Ashangos had received. This gigantic forest extends north and south of the Kquator, varying in breadth from two to three degrees on each side of it.* South of the Equator, it ex- * All the living plants collected on my return to the coast, I presented to Dr. J. D. Hooker, for the Royal Botanic Gardens at Kew, of which he is the able Director. 1am very glad to find that one of the orchids I col- lected near Goumbi proved a new species of Angraecum; and Dr. Hooker has done me the honour to name it after me. Orchidaceous plants are abundant in the tracts of woodland near the sea; but they were less plentiful in the interior. Cnap. XX. SCARCITY OF LARGE ANIMALS. 407 tended much further southerly than I have been, and on the north it reached further than I travelled in my former journey. Now and then prairies looking like islands, resembling so many gems, are found in the midst of this dark sea of everlasting foliage, and how grateful my eyes met them no one can conceive, unless he has lived in such a solitude. Now and then prairies are seen from the sea-shore: but they do not extend far inland, and are merely sandy patches left by the sea in the progress of time. In this great woody wilderness man is scattered and divided into a great number of tribes. The forest, thinly inhabited by man, was still more scantily inhabited by beasts. There were no beasts of burden—neither horse, camel, donkey, nor cattle. Men and women were the only carriers of burden. Beasts of burden could not live, for the country was not well adapted for them. The only truly domes- ticated animals were goats and fowls—the goats increasing in number as I advanced into the interior, and the fowls decreasing. I was struck by the absence of those species of animals always found in great number in almost every other part of Africa. Neither lions, rhino- ceroses, zebras, giraffes, nor ostriches were found, and the great variety of elands and gazelles (although found almost everywhere else in Africa) were not to be seen there. Travellers in my locality would never dream that such vast herds of game could be found on the same continent as those described by dif- ferent travellers. Hence large carnivorous animals are scarce; leopards and two or three species of 408 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY AND CLIMATE. Cuap. XX. hyenas and jackals only being found, Little noc- turnal animals are more common, but they are very difficult to get at. Reptiles abound in the forest. There are a great many species of snakes, the greater part of which are very poisonous. Some are ground- snakes, others spend part of their lives upon trees, while some are water-snakes. Among the ground- snakes one of the most to be dreaded is the Clotho nasicorns. There are several species of Achis and of - Atheris; these are generally found upon trees; they are small and very venomous. OF 258.1 ees Transverse diameter, lower portion 0 53 OE oO aS Height of the Shgines of the lower nid cue yh tg | : on | App. I. SKULLS OF WESTERN AFRICANS. The following are three of the dimensions of ninety- three skulls from Fernand Vaz and the Interior : . lines 6 Circum- ference of ° H ecloe ee Peed Bo Bei 1s Bea {. BOS ; he or) OZS | Ba 4 g|se° ae endl [oe = eae | 610 a —| aS 5 ae Stee |i to. 2 | = god . 3 § Ame ic a at oS a0 ay | eee e) ms Zi OQ.) © tf => 9 4 9 \ 3 : 3 3 3 I = a ELlgGreMRDDnonrenednanrre 0D oe soe ta a ee el Pe ae ete ed es Cred — fo amen oS oe aoe ene es On nn a. Ss | ; ake UR ti Re Ufa an Ma iin i a ak ae ie a a aL cl a aa IR Sil ca IN ; go) BS, pe os eae Rp ere a Oo SF OS O GMO G © © CS G&G &@ Gi Gc © a cae | | ra BO Be OL 80 SOE SI 8D 8B! Sas Re On Ne ie Ste ae te eee ee ain eo. © tt, © So Ss & SC. 0. FS So oS ON Ss SO.N CSM iat O Oo SS Soo Awe = aos || mm ; | ce rm re ~Orrrrewennnwnnrnwoarrwmnnornreonor © Mm O> Do oOomnA WMH Howoerennodinodcirs Nn wt wm wo i.e) om NM HO © Om OOH DO OD ODO ODOM DB DO'AD'O ke ie.2) ie.) ee OM MO OH MO HOO UM HOH COHN HO MMHATSTMMNOMH OM HM O OH b.. 0 O Peot= se N OO HO O & wim id uw 1 9) 9) 5 9) 9) 5) 5 3) 5) 5 5 9) 9) 9) 9) sy) 5 sy) 5 5 5 bee SO OO 8 Ook ob be OU = 6 ohm) be 00 i 6 ee a = Oe 10 0 |. 0 1 a | be | ri rt ord DrFeorrnanenoorereoworoorworrwvwdreweormend © © OAR oCmMaAN OoOMr~ ORS = Ss es = = = aS NN 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Hs m= rel | Length Length | Breadth Circum- | Length | Length | Breadth Circum- | of of of ference of _ No. of of of ference of | Skull. Cranium. | Cranium. Cranium. | Skull. Cranium. Cranium. Cranium. a in. 1 in. lines. in. lines. rae lines. in. lines. in. lines. in. lines. meee 6. SL 6118 6 | 81), 8 2) 7.0) 6 0 mere 6) 5 SS) 17 9 82) 8 oO) 7 Oe Slit. s 8 0| 7 0; 5 3/19 Oj 83/8 0} 7 015 0/19. 0 ci 01-5 BIS §i sf) & O| 6 oO fe Bis *:9 ee OO} &\: 3) 18.9 85 | 7 0) €e Ot yeti 8 moo 7 S| 5 6|19° 6186) 7 10° 7 0) 5 2 3 71) 7 0/5 8)18 9] 87, 8 38, 7 8 cee, Gry ie pe See? 0|-5 8/19 Ol s8'.8 2: 7 O} & lie 9 ea eG) SiO te 0] 897° B 8h 7 Ol Bre hae oo 8 3/7 3/5 6/19 6} 90, 7 10| 6 6) 5 O/T 6 710) 6 G6) 5 6 18 9) 91.7 10 6 6) 5 3/18 3 * B.S 6) 5.0) 18 0) 8 7.10; F 07,8 oe 0 IS ee 9/93) 7 SB SB” OO eee Pee 0 | 7.0) 5 Bis 6) | | App. I. DIMENSIONS. 4538 Making allowance for difference of sex—the skulls not exceeding seven inches eight lines in length, being most of them plainly female—the range of diversity is here much less than would be found in the same number of European skulls from a locality of the same extent as the ground from which M. Du Chaillu gathered the above collection. And this comparative conformity appears to de- pend on a corresponding uniformity in the manner of life, in the fewer wants, the less diversified pur- suits, of the Equatorial Africans. Their food, the mode of obtaining it, the bodily actions, muscular . exertions, and mental efforts stimulating and govern- ing such acts, vary comparatively little in the people visited by M. Du Chaillu. The cannibal habits of the Fans offer the main difference, and with them BDe 454 SKULLS OF WESTERN AFRICANS. App. I. are associated the larger cranial dimensions, as a general rule. But, in all, the prevalent low social status, the concomitant sameness, and contracted range, of ideas—the comparatively limited variety in the whole series of living phenomena, from child- hood to old age, of human communities of the grade of the Ashiras and Fans—govern the conformity of their low cranial organisation. In my work on the Archetype skeleton I note, among other characters of the general homology of bones of the human head, the degrees of variability to which the several vertebral elements were respec- tively subject.* The centrums and neurapophyses of the cranial vertebre maintain the greatest constancy, the neural spines the least, in the vertebral column of mammals, as in the cranial region thereof m the vast series of the varieties and races of mankind : the hemal arches and their diverging appendages are the seats of in- termediate degrees of variation. Accordingly, between the lowest forms of African and Australian skulls and the highest forms of Euro- pean skulls, the difference in size and shape is least in the basi-occipito-sphenoids, in the ex-occipitals, alisphenoids, and orbitosphenoids: it is greatest in the super-occipital, parietals, frontals, and nasals. The maxillary and mandible are next in degree of varia- bility, especially at the terminal anterior part which ~ represents the hemal spine, and is the seat of the characters which Ethnology terms “ prognathism,” * On the Archetype and Homologies of the Vertebrate Skeleton.’ 8va. | 1848, p. 137. App. I. CONDITIONS OF VARIABILITY. 459 “orthognathism,” “ opisthognathism.” As in the neural, so in the heemal arches, the parts become sub- ject to variety as they recede from the centrum. The palatal bones (pleurapophyses) show most constancy, the maxillaries (hemapophyses) the next degree, the pre-maxillaries (hemal spines) the least constancy.* So, likewise, with regard to the centrums them- selves, the terminal one or “ vomer” is more variable than those behind it. The tympanic (pleurapophysis) offers as few cha- racteristics to the ethnologist, as does the palatine. The malar bones and zygomatic arches—diverging, as appendages, from the maxillary arch—are seats of variety only inferior to the neural spines. The pterygoid processes are almost, if not quite, as vari- able as the malar bones. Accordingly, the variability or value of ethnolo- gical admeasurements depends on the vertebral ele- — ments, or general homology, of the parts they may happen to include. The length of the skull is more constant than that of the cranium, in the entire series of human races, because it includes the ver- tebral centrums, whilst the other includes only neural spines. Moreover, the parts that chiefly vary the length of the skull are those behind the foramen magnum, and those before the palatine bones. . The dimension from the anterior border of the foramen magnum to the fore part of the pre-sphe- * The range of variety in this vertebral element may be estimated by ~ the fact that all the ordinal characters of the class of birds derived from the “rostrum” are furnished by modifications of the premaxillary and pre- mandibular bones. 456 ETHNOLOGICAL TERMS OF ART. Ape. I, noid, or to the palato-maxillary suture, is, perhaps, regard being had to sex, as constant as any. The part behind the cranial centrums is chiefly affected by the super-occipital; the part in front by the pre-maxillary.. The extreme height, breadth, and length of the cranium, with the curves and con- tours of the dome, help the ethnologist with the range of differences which it has pleased him to express by the terms: brachycephalic, brassocephalic, brachistocephalic, subbrachycephalic, _mesocephalic, -mecocephalic, mecistocephalic, dolichocephalic, doli- chistocephalic, pyramidocephalic, doidocephalic, cym- bocephalic, stenocephalie, eurycephalic, cylindroce- phalic, hypsicephalic, orthocephalic, phoxocephalic, sphenocephalic, platycephalic, spheerocephalic, cubi- cephalic, &c., with the terminal varieties, as in brachy- cephalous and brachycephaly, played upon each compound; to which add “ phznozygous,” “ crypto- zygous,” as the cranial dome may give or hide aview of the zygomatic arches; also dolichorhinous, brachy- rhinous, platyrhinous, or platyrhinal, &c., &., for all the gradations of diversity of the neural spines of the foremost vertebra. | | ) There is no particular harm in such array or dis- play of terms of art—save where they are extended from signifying a gradation or variety of cranial form to the constant chafacter of a race, a nation, a family, or a period—in the absence of that extent and amount of observation which is absolutely requi- — ‘site to prove or disprove such constancy. In the — extensive series of skulls of the natives of a limited tract of the northern part of the peninsula of Hin- — # App. I. SKULLS OF AMERICAN INDIANS. 457 dustan, varieties of shape of the cranium were observed which might be expressed by at least half a dozen of the above-cited Greek polysyllabics, and even of opposite extremes, and this, not only in the general series of Nepalese skulls, but sometimes in the minor series of a tribe or village.* Very analogous are the results as affecting “ brachycephalic,” dolicocephalic,”’ &c., “families,” “varieties,” or “races,” to which a correspondingly expanded survey of the skulls of the aboriginal Indians of America has led the accurate and painstaking ethnologist, Dr. Aitken Meigs.j In the first place he finds that, in the general series of aboriginal American crania, there is a range of diversity of proportions of the cranial eavity, which would give the ethnologist grounds for distributing them into three groups: 1, Dolichocephah ; 2, Mesocephali; 3, Brachycephali; but these are not coincident with areas or periods. Not any of them is distinctive of a particular family, or race, or nation, or other group, either according to time or to space. Thus the skulls of the Creek Indians may be, in a general way ‘eurycephalic, 7.¢. shorter and more broadly oval than those of the Assinaboins, and these, in like manner, than the crania of the Ottawas. But among the Creeks is a specimen (No. 441) which is “ brachycephalic,” and a skull of one of the Dacota Indians “stands between the Assinaboin’s and’ the Creek’s” (p. 37). Among the Osages of the Upper * “ Report on a series of Skulls of various Tribes of Mankind inhabiting Nepal,” in ‘Reports of the British Association for the Advancement of Science,’ for 1850. + ‘Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, May, 1866. . * 458 SKULLS OF AMERICAN INDIANS. App, IL Missouri is & “ longish head, inclining to the Swedish form, occupying a position intermediate between the long aud short heads” (p. 20); a third (No. 54) has “the coronal region almost round, like that of the true Germanic head” (p. 19). Another specimen (No. 54) “ belongs to the angularly round or square- headed Gothic type” (p. 19). Others, again, are “ brachycephalic.” . Among the Blackfoot Indians are some skulls “‘decidedly dolichocephalic ” (p. 17) ; but in No, 1227, of a Chief (and probably, therefore, with a more laterally expanded brain) the skull “ occupies an intermediate place between the long and short heads” (p. 17). The skull of a Mohican also occupies “a position intermediate between the long and short heads, and approaches the Mongol form” (p. 20). “The Ottawas of Michigan may be partly referred to the arched type” (p. 22). But “ No. 1007 is brachy- cephalic” (i.).. Others of this tribe, Nos. 1006, 1008, 1009, “depart from this type and approach the Swedish form. I have consequently placed them in the “dolichocephalic” division” (p. 22). The State of Michigan, however, was once occupied or hunted over by other aboriginal tribes, the Meno- minées, ¢. g., “the cranial specimens of which differ from each other not a little” (p. 22). The details of these differences are very instructive as to the degree of value of the terms of cranial shapes as denoting ethnological groups. Thus, after _ pointing out those approaching or attaiming the “ Brachycephali,” Dr. Meigs writes :—“ Among the Miamis of Indiana we again encounter the dolicho- cephalic type” (p. 22). But here also it is added App. I. CONDITIONS OF VARIABILITY. 459 that the skull of a Chief, No. 542, “is in many respects like the German heads in the collection, especially those from Tiibingen, Frankfort, Berlin : it has the Swedish occiput” (2b.). “No. 1055 ap- proaches the angular Gothic form” (7.). In others “the outline of the crown forms a more or less rounded oval” (2b.). “No. 106 approaches the arched type.’ “The specimens in the collection constituting the Seminole group vary not a little from each other” (p. 25). . After descriptive details, Dr. Meigs proceeds: “It will thus be seen that in this group there are at least two, if not three, distinct types” (p. 26). How often one feels the desire to ask an author the meaning in which he uses the word “type”! As applied to cranial configuration, the grades or shades of transition are such that the choice of any one step in the series for a term of comparison must be arbi- trary. | With regard to the aborigines of America, the ethnologist may classify them according to their tribes, family names, or autonomy, or according to the districts inhabited by them, or according to their cranial characters. But, it is abundantly shown by Dr. Meigs, as, indeed, was to be inferred from the ‘Crania Americana’ of Moreton, that, with the arbi- trary assumption of certain proportions, dimensions, &c., as ‘‘type-characters,’ the cranial classification would differ from the tribal or national, geographical or epochal one. What constitutes the prevalent “ dolichocephalic type,” ethnologically speaking, among the African 460 SKULLS OF WESTERN AFRICANS. App, I. skulls which have called forth the present remarks, is not, as the term would imply, a greater length of cranium than in Indian and European skulls which would be called “ brachycephalic,” or “ hypsicephalic,” but merely a want of fillmg out of the brain-case by lateral or vertical expansion. The dimension of “length” is more constant than that of “ breadth” or “depth” in the cerebral hemispheres of the human brain. . Were the natives of Western Equatorial A frica, dis covered or visited by M. Du Chaillu and represented by the skulls ‘which he collected and transmitted, as constant, keen, and clever hunters as the North American Indians, there might then be expected to rise among them here or there an individual with qualities making him superior in his craft, and enabling him to direct and dominate over the more common sort. And in proportion as the brain might have a concomitant increase of size in such “ Chief,” we should expect the long (“ dolichocephalic type”) to merge into the broad (“ brachycephalic”), or lofty (“hypsicephalic), or globular (sphcerocephalic) modi- fications of cranial configuration. - In all the Negro skulls in the present collection, as in those of Boschismen, Mincopies, Australians, and every other variety that has come under my observation, the essential characters of the archence- phalous subclass and of its sole genus and species are as definitely marked as in the skulls of the _ highest white races. APPENDIX IL INSTRUMENTS USED IN THE EXPEDITION TO ASHANGO-LAND. First Supply. (From Mr. Potter, successor to Cary.) 1 Aneroid, brass, in morocco case, 2 inches in diameter, registering from 15 to 31 inches. * 2 Compasses, prismatic, with stand, shades, and reflector, 3 inches diameter (Singer’s patent). 2 Compasses, pocket (Singer’s patent), 14 inches diameter. Drawing instruments, one set in German silver, in case, 6 inches by 94 inches. Drawing pins, 2 dozen. 2 Horizons Artificial, folding roof, improved iron trough and bottle, in sling case. Hypsometrical Apparatus, viz. :— Bull’s-eye lantern, copper boiler, 3 reservoirs for spirits, oil, or candle. ‘ 3 Thermometers for heights by boiling water, marked to _ 215°, in brass case. 2 Thermometers, thermal or sun, marked to 230°, in brass case. 2 Thermometers, graduated for Fahrenheit and Centigrade. 1 Thermometer, graduated for Centigrade and Reaumur. | Magnetic-electro machine, with 90 feet of cord or conducting - wire. 2 Magnifiers, or reading glasses, large size. Mercury, 7 lbs. in stone bottle, as reserve supply. Parallel-ruler, Acland’s pattern, 18 inches. 462 LIST OF INSTRUMENTS. App. IL. Protractor, circular, with compass rectifier, in mahogany box. Protractor, circular, in brass. Rain gauge and spare glasses (Livingstone’s pattern). Scale, 18 inches metal, graduated to inches, and: subdivided to tenths and hundredths, in box. Sextant, 4 inches radius, silver arc, cut to 20”. Tape, 100 feet. . Extras. Spare glass for rain gauge; spare compass cards; leather skins to ciean glasses; tin foil, &ec. Most of the above instruments were damaged by the canoe being upset, in attempting to land through the surf. Second Supply. 2 Aneroids, brass, 2 inches diameter, registering from 15 to 31 inches. : 2 Compasses, prismatic, 3 inches diameter, shades and reflector. 1 Compass, pocket. 1 Sextant, 6 inches radius, silver are, cut to 10". | 4 Watches, by Mr. J. Brock (George Street, Portman Square). 1 Watch, by Frodsham (Strand). BOOKS, &c. Nautical Almanacks, 1863-4-5-6. Work books, ruled to form. | Skeleton Map, ruled in squares, 75 sheets. Memorandum books. EXTRA INSTRUMENTS. 1 Sextant, 8 inches radius, presented by G. Bishop, Esq., +» Twickenham; cut to 10”. 1 Binocular, presented by the Directors of the Night Asylum, Glasgow, after the lecture I delivered for that institution. 1 Telescope, presented by the same. i Universal Sun Dial, presented by the ii co ; Society. -§ App. lI. REMARKS ON INSTRUMENTS. 463 Remarks on the Instruments used in taking the Astronomical Observations. No. 1 Sextant, 4 inches radius, by Cary, was used for the altitude No. No. All All of the stars and planets in connection with a lunar. 2 Sextant, 6 inches radius, by Cary (the best instrument), always used for time, and in taking the distance in a lunar and meridian altitude. 3 Sextant, used for altitude of the moon under 120° (art. horiz.), and when more than that quantity one of the other sextants was used. the above were lost in my retreat, except the watches and two aneroids. ———E the instruments above enumerated were carefully tested before leaving England. The aneroids brought back were again tested after my arrival. My watches proved to have kept very good time; and I ought to express here my thanks to Mr. Brock, of George Street, Portman Square, for the care he took in supplying me with the best watches. They are still in good order; and I am greatly indebted to Sir George Back for recommending Mr. Brock to me. The instruments by Mr. Potter, successor of Mr. Cary, of 181, Strand, proved to be excellent, and stood well the rough travelling they had to go through. t ——. < 6g 1g 1] 262 |oz 1 | 0¢ #3 Ig | suofepy yg » ™ ride i L-6L | 08 T cs OL 60 39 | SHofeyy pg | ttt ofodeyy 08 “eH sf ) | COST es 8) sh T| I-94 | 02 0 — | 00 Zo 8 Nia eypoaeg *" 08 a GL bP Lf EOP 1000 tE Al OR SOs OSE] “tet caeyE S 08 6h FF | PSL 10 LT—} 08 Ig #8 |“ sTedep x K¢ 02 8) [| 908 | 0%. 6 — | 02:0 29 | *** Twepe | omsteoeese+ pus P/pz oi *poyoofoy | 8S 3 | 9-08 | OF IT — | 00 40 Lo | °° IUepuy of FI a co 0 T| &-bL | 06 T — | 06 98 OST | cr CC’ SIEM st ia = OL WT} SFL | 08. P|, 0888 gee Ps oypeduy | rts mosunT | ee < 92 9 T| 6-LL | OF — | 00 6 99 | - quepnge {sna TPueret| TI eq aa COP EL Oe) 06 LE: | 08 8 Sear ets arene ES 62 8¢ $F T| 9-08 |00 LT — | 00 ge Ost | “***sHony » 6 Ss cl cp T| 9-08 |00 T+] 00 TF 29 [| ° Tepug >» ee 6z 2 92 Sb L| $-18 | 01 IT — | OS SF Zar | °° weqpemog 66 62 2 1S FF LT] 9-08 | OL T+] 06 8h Zar |‘ yneqeuog | se* spuaIg | Zz = HL oe T] [OL O- | OT ge ger | vamenomog | Bestia a 9 ‘AON é €2 8¢ T| 8 | or £ +] OL 98 ger | + eYTBUIO lee eae 8% | € 98 1] 84 Joe @— | OL 96 ver [+ gneqzommog | y | ¥% | 9F 98 1 8. |02 3— | 00 FT Lge | t Uskp» a 2G | SI $8 T GL | 03 3— | OF #0 Tat peeehe* A “MB IAD),| 97 794°**882 8 ETO: | Te eG oor ea Fi ear , F981 *SY.IVUIOIY se 9 opnyyery | ‘dma, “IOLI “UT Been ee | “yoelqO *d0V1d *04R(] 3 | | | | <~ UACALIIEWT YO SNOLLVAUASHO a S 90. 8¢ T| 0-LL }00 @—| os 60 ob | sHofey pu +s | o~ / 61 89 T| 0-22 | OF 3 -]| 00 s¢ 49 | suolem-p 3 | | 9 , i 8¢ | 8-8L | 06 G—| 00 0 6G |" sfonID» | bs 9 96 8¢ T| 1-92 |0F €—| OL OL 9L | suolyy pu < | ¢ 146 8S T| 9-LL | 0S S— | OF TS 6G | “rt BTONIQ ® | vrreeereres BGuTOW | g I 1 T| £02 |06 8 - | OF OS Tel |‘ sorguy | os o or 1g t| o-e2 |00 ¥—| 02 o% ob | stole “pu | - z oun ej OL 1G L| O-LL |03 €- | 08 I 49 | “** HEED g | = | Is S FL IG L/| O-LL | OF T— | OF €€ 9ET |“ SRINpory | ff 08 2 cI I¢ 5 8-82 | 01 £— | 00 #0 6¢ | ‘*"* SioniQ » | “te uTeSuerON | Og + 6¢ 0¢ IT} 8-8L | 01 T— | 00 6¢ 29 | siofen vt “a 81 3 el Ig T) 8-8£ |os 1T—| os #0 69 |“ semQ > | é SI S ee If £) 8-82 | OL T— | 03 28 29 | suofem a % ? 81 ms Ty. 0¢ [T; 0-2 }00 T—]| 00 OL 29 | sHofem pg 91 a ez Ig | 0-GL op TL — | OL %0 69 | ‘""* sfonIQ » ss 91 Bi 6 If [| 0-GL ee T= |0b, #. eg or" stone ‘a 91 zs Lg 0¢ T| 0O-LL |00 L- | 0G €8 get | “"**sumpory cI : 3 eel GZ Ig 1! 0-42 |00 T—| 0G 6f 39 | ‘* EMeUDyY 5 GT +! 2 Ig If I} 6-L2L |00 tT —| 0¢ ef g9 | ‘** EMeUED » 2 GI = co If T| 8.8L | 08 1 —!| OF 60 29°] sHOoleM Ag | ve +L GZ If Tj} O-LL |00 T—| OF SL 89 | ** HMEDED » = ZI 90 I¢ LT] $82,102 T—]| 00 40 69 | “""* stonip» es Say 9. zo 1¢ t| 6-22 )0¢ o-| 0¢ ze on | suoley pu ws G — co If LT} O-LL | OL T—| 02 €0 6g |“ SIONIQ®? < | 1 4ew ie te OS L| ZGL | 0S O-| OF os TS | sHoleM a» a ae a LL 1g 1 I z : ie — 0B +0 6S eerere onip » . a - fi 5 OBSERVATIONS FOR LATITUDE. App. I. | 466 ‘oroqdsourye Azezy *sYICUIO YT - N tT) co co F CO ses SF OO Ss © oT Ss SSS Sst ase FF NAN NAN AANA A ANON Ae SS Se AN © COON co oo wm 1 ‘S opnyyeT ‘dum J, = = oD 6 Of I =) — a nN ONO MOM OM HD MA I | ~ = ~ ‘1OLIG ‘UT 00 9T 9&T 00 9L Q&T OF 8I 9&T “MOZLIOF] [BIOgNAY WV UVIPLoyy —— ie LMUyUOG 9 “LINED » "oe SHANOLY Heres sore *** @BUOLOZ veeees sTIOOg 9 stiofeyy *‘Q & *** Tineyuey g “** TIneyUED 2 erers SLIM IOIV seers gmMyOr ‘** Emejuey ¢ “* LMeyueD 2 *** Lmeyuey) gf ‘** TmMeBjUE_ % serees SLIM IOI suiofeyy *Q & seeees SION) “** LIneyUeD » ‘* Emeyuey gf Heese ston) seere* STON) @ ‘* Lmeyuey) 2 palqo AGNLILVT YOAL SNOLLVANASEO = Sotedvernnte “wuRqopT | Paar ean eeuinenee mosu0yy ee seseeeeeeeee TENOGUIOIN, ee esuoyOy ensue x ee eeececceee srqumosy cé eee eseseeeere BQexyOTL “e0Ig ¢ Ame 9% 9% LI LI LI LI 91 9T CI cl FI #1 II Il I II OL OI OT 8 g oung g98T aqucl ; ! = | ee a 467 OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES. App. II. ‘HOOT, JO “OY UNG G-18 | he | | . | 0& SP OT 0€ QO wo OL § wo | |0z ¢ wo ‘woo Jo‘MUng (| slg | | | GP LI OT | 0} T U0 4 OF 9g UO | 0g 0 Ho “HOOT JO “"M UNG 8-18 He Oo” -OL Oh | OF Tuo | 02 0H OF 9g UO " ' Oo | “IRL “ ! "A ‘opnyiduoy], Zuyy[nsoy | ‘1011 XOpUy dua], | | i. oC a. |. Vee cee Of ee 0D. | AV OS | eee ae ie rly Oa. ee oD BP e Go- air elo) io sae 0 FF L OL I> GOL | °° “""e0uRpsiq | 1¢ ZF L Ol 61: 6 fh "aS BE oe : 02 6% 6L Coe 18S" IT oe ae ee a i “LT uee 0s 8 46 [os av D | OL 0 OO eo a ab CEPT de: 86° TT Ol SI F og ag ctr f° eb Deets c¢ 6 F 0S ¢ SII | ‘*oounsig | 06 8 F | 03 6% 9F ‘a8 - —av@| obo F 02 I 88 eee eee ees yp cl F $ 6 66 OC TU pec, 2 ER Ga Ob. ee. ae ee ae Dey eg. -g ae Rg 9 | ae or ch 9¢ § gar Sg & ean he hc ete cI co sg Ol 6h GIL | °° “*‘ooumsiq | 0 9 § 08 SP: iy a ie OG 8 0 LS 8F Rr hae | Ol ar go | puso | °".9 uue “ 1 ° 8 m q¥ cSst ‘ooUBPSI(] Pur “9, V Boe ae: “qOOAL 4q om, “2081 oye “~oolqo . SHONVISIG YVNNT WOTL SNOILVAUASAO App. Il. OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES "MOOT! JO “NT IVI O'. bP OF | ——————e "WOO JO “A AVE ¢-18 cy 8h OL zh | ‘uooyy jo ‘GT ung | 9.08 0 é Ol (Oe RN ee es it oy “Gy ‘opnyisuo'y Sanjay, ‘dua J, 0§ Q wo 02 g WO 0b ¢ wo og Q wo o¢ ¢g uo OF F UO OT gue OF ¢G wo Ut U] ‘LOLI, XOpPUT 06 6 69 OL FL 69 7] ‘ oO ‘oouvISICT pus 4, ~IVJ -IV} WY. D | -0teens WV XUOd | 3G 81 ior) quar, {sou} ‘ounystcq)| OF WV XNTTOd | gg AP Re LE eS | OT FG She PE ae w%& § | V 0 03 ZL |‘ ‘*e0umsI | Ig 9¢ Z | 0. 21 Mo.) i sae Seg ers ay | A eee 1 Ol 9 wo 0G 8 601 eo ay DE ge sree ef eee S "mooyy JO “AM ung ¥-16 me 0 6 ot | ‘nv D| ze re 2 . = 0G 18. €0T, po" = IV © | Gh 6G G S | 0G CL SL pee OOF s: GI 8% & | 2 6 Bradt Cer erat on ome ae Pw Rees Z 1 a 6 I eg ee a ae. ‘i Nog 247 opr 1 Leeman | ee" pz 7% A 03 LI uo 08.FS. DOT. tt ys te eae | a 03 9 wo O.. 0886 . 4) ay 2 ce gre, | bo ee oak een o | Ae ee eae GF 69 6 = Ba na | 9-08 rei uo { 02 Zt FL | ct uyendorp| 9 1G 6 “< “ * swoon, Jo “GE 284g 9-08 a OL 62 -6I1 | “°° ‘HV od | Go Te 6 a 08 61S 718. yD ep Pb E "4 0 69 99 |) OL 6 x cl ¢ If 0g 0 wo{! og 6g 9g for due ce OF 6 ; sae Bas yr OS ut Lg . 03 FE 6 ’ App, II. OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES "MOOPt JO "MA JouRTT 6-98 “es OT. 98 Le, 1" =" “Gee oo or ee 61.9 ‘Le “*snu9A JOUVY | Sb IL 9 0 8s LF ) 0 OL 9 Ww CL 8h OT 0 I Uodl OF 9¢ LF feu acumen | tee | OF 98 LF o¢ 9 9 | 0§ 1. uO OL 61 09 “*snueA Jo"TV | LI Fb 9 . N Log I wo QOL SGT ena Pe tee se "s dy "MOOT JF "AM OURTA &- #8 a | 06 G8 LOE OS ae | ee Bete 03 Sh GF * TV snueA | $6 LP 9 0¢ ZL Ss 0 FF 9 F WI o ch gS OI OF 0 WY! Of OF 8 Jf reou ootrEREE 9g 68 9 0 EL -a¢ GZ Lg 9 OL 9 wo 02 S 8F “*snueA JoUV | O€ GE 9 0% LI wo OSE LOTT hs OE WA aee ee. af ae ee “MOOR JO "M OUT Z-¥8 nes OG GEE | ee vs ay 2 eg 68 oS 0 TG “ES “* ‘ay snueA | ZI 8% 9 | O- 2% 96 Ch 9% «9 gI @, I 7 04] 0 9 $8 tron Neonmmra)| 22 93 9 OF ¢ ge Ol $2 9 | 0S: LI OF (2G 96TT (] th et A De ee 9 U OL 9 02 Z 9¢ “ve ay snueA | 0€ LI 9 (‘pyu00) opokey | LT Tady 4% ‘ ° IC “ i u" i fe} 8 wW ¥ C98 “ay fopnyizuo0'T Buryjnsoyy | ‘dua, “LOIIG, XOpuy ‘OUBISIT pue ATV “‘qoa(qo “QUILT, "908[ OWT ! | SHONVIISIG HVNAT YOA SNOILVAYASAO ra ee ee ee a — H ORL? (8 8-8L = OF SI 6 * apy voids | 06 Z& 6 OG ie ea a Dee eee 06 OG TOT og LZ 6 og * IL 0¢ 0 wo}; OL GF TOL |f sey ‘oun )| OF 9% 6 0g IG T0T Z G3 6 0 #1 uo or ¢6 spi" oY TVD | Th: Tee kee OL g wo 0 02 98 |". ‘Hv Pods] 16 08 6 oe - TOO? hg 8-8L ck or og cs | ‘aMvedg| o¢ 8st 6 - Cy 0G CES r= ay ei ee fo) 06 9¢ TOT or. or ¢ S c 48 IL OF O wo%]- 0¢--98 TOP sa soommmer} | Os SE -6 < . 02 Lg TOT TS: Th: 6 a | ie hw | Ob | rei ene 4 4 0° Ss Be OF 8 6L |‘ BIdgjomy | 0 ¢ 6 * Ly - | 0-98 re 0 9F 9G os 8E Gl L = ated | 108, T, U0, i Oh Bh he av eedeg | 9¢ OL L ns mS | OOH JO “AL 180K -"f| Of 9¢ FEI |. MVD | 93 8% 9 OL wb og | “snueAjovV | L 9% 9 0 Ib Lt “S, ¥e"9 bo 0g 9¢ OI og t wod] 0% OF LF | yeou Nooumstq]| -22 33 9 0 OF LF ZL 06 9 s , 0g T wo 0 Le 7g | snueA JONV | SL LT 9 0F IT wo On 8 LER. «| Se ey cai, OG: FE: 9 rh is ved A as i=] < ‘omy 10,7 ee ee - ( “"MOOPT JO "W IEG 0& 1S 11 OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES a ‘ ° “TW ‘epnyisuo7T Suyy[nsoy 472 0 {I uO 0 FT uo | OF § wo |. ela § | u 1 | ‘dma y, *1011Q Xepuy ‘SHONVISIG UVNAT YOA SNOILVAUASAO 06 ge LOL og T 29 0 02 98 “ ! ° ‘eoURISI. PUL “YTV eee eee UV py "any soreyuy ee “PY aanyes eve eee IV y quary 4eq} -Iey “ooUvsIqg “eV winzeg eee eee ‘ITV yd “apy eordg eee eee ati: 7 quarry 89u} -1e} ‘ooueysIq. ese eee WV ) eee “Ty vordg “2f40 ‘OWL, oo OY i ss IT ar ma LE) 08 se “s "% Tady COST "2yRq (p}u00) ofofeyy for) oD si Sacks sickens ‘oe + eee ti 473 AT MAYOLO. App, Ii. “MOOT JO "AA TVG OF 6h LOT 02 tr &¢ 02 Z 66 0& 9€ OL OF 0 uO 032 T 66 he COT VE 98a OF 9 UO 02 @ = 8¢ OO; ~bi- ue OF O¢ OOT NOOW JO"M IIg JO °M 181g an 0 gs. Fe 0€ * SL” S&T 0 6S & ch cc OL 0€ 0 wo 0€ 8¢ &F 0. 8c S&F 0 g¢ wo 02 Gb FET bs se SS Oe eee 0° gs T9 “LOOP JO Jo ‘Mung: “ung € +26 rok 0€ 9% OF ) FT OL OL 66 96 OT 8S 96 cI 98 OT 0g 0 uO near cmt 0 s¢ 96 eee “WV Bi i WV XNT[Og Qquary 4Sot]} -TBy ‘oouvysICy HV XNTOg “an oy ATV Wereqoply 5. LY oD quiiy 489 -Teou ‘edueySICT che | ea ITV wereqoply rt asa oD *** QoUvISICT ch Zo 6 0 Ig 6 Go Lb 6 LI Sb 6 ch 6 OF 6 LE 6 OF 98 L we ee L or 18 2 g8 8% L og 13 Lb 9% HL 0g 03 L 6B 98 F lL $8 % G 18 F Ig 08 + CE 63 F 9 8% F oe tr dy F:-9L eee bail —_ as (om) TZ IS 61 1% GG LE 1S y 0S 6 € SF 6 Z «OF 6 Ob Pr 6 SLE Te. 6 Ih 98 6 68 8 6 tl SS 6 App. IT, *‘UOOy[ JO “ME AVIS "MOOT JO “OT Teg OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES aq ‘opnyZuorTy Zurypusoeyy “LOLI XOPuUT ‘90URSI(T pur “av 476 eat ct Cates an z “ doueysiq | 8g ree A ae a) a av vodg | ZI OD | ee ‘SIV vordg | 0g or cg eee ey or Seer ea - “* gounpsiq | 8% ‘ary woIdg | §3 be Exar eh ae wed ‘ITV y ‘ITV vordg quay 4seq} -I8} ‘ooweysiqy “4WLV vordg ay “j0f40 SIG UVNOT MOA SNOILLVAYHSAO —_——_— «t “ | ee (;p}U09) opokey | yt Avy C98T — ‘o0vld 07 lt boa ‘OUIT} 10,7 noo Jo "Y ouRpA ‘ gl 6 IT oO _ oO b a a EY teens ost a ey 66é 6¢ OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES App. II. 478 ;0 6 wo | oF sp GL {** ‘waondne | Te ze It | Q.) 2 op 68 29 |°" “ “IVD | 08 Se AT . mo vi "NOOJW JO “W POULTT 0-LL 0: 0% 69 ee, Wt) OG: GB. ant at | O ate we “* ary ipdne | O) 28" TE OL F§ GOL 0¢ OS IT 0S F& GOT Qt 68 kt Quay sot} Ue Sh 0 0 MT oF Fe GOT |f ry ‘coumsig | ge Le II \ 0 $8 60r p 98 98 II 0 6 wo 0 F 89 |" ‘TW qoHdne | 23 8 IT | 0° L wo 02 £8 SO f° MVD 8 Bea = * “UO JO “GT JoULTT O-LL oe 0. 08 OL )"- 5" SVD.) SP 61 At | 0 ¢ #9 “~ ary sondne | ge--2T IT OF 6&8 GOI ae AL AL 0 OF GOT Cl #1 It quay ysoy} St 89 OL ve: MS 0 OF GOL |f -aey ‘oouRsI y} OL ZL IT 0S OF 60L \ 2e 6) at 0 8g wo OF LP 09 vr py edie tl. pe. By art \ 0¢ 9g wo 0) -Ree ae ot eae. SAT | OF 0 wo | 1) a ae a * Ig F% GL ‘OUIT} 1O,J OF @ SIL |** ‘HV BIdg | Og ZZ ZBI | Cp}UOd) ofokvyY | °° F Avy " ’ fe) TBA “ 1 " 1 ° 8 uw af c98 I i “q ‘opnyisuo'Ty Sur,;nsoyy | ‘dua, | *IOLI XOPUT ‘a0UvISIG] puv “IV ‘g00lqO ‘OU ], ‘OBI *ayeq | ‘SHONVILSIG UVNOT TOL SNOLLVAYHSAO _ 479 O2k >; 0g [ wo | OF T wo cE © “WOOK JO “TY pour, 0-LL iat 5 ey Db a | : an = pm wa OF 0 wo =" | | ( 0 6 wo | 0d. Ze ‘uooHe jo OUT | OLL | 0S I 3 OF Q wo App, II. 601 60T 601 60T 6G 08 9¢ LL 601 601 601 6UT ) eee Gé eee €«¢ ‘ITV qoqtdn e ITV toyrdne HD: quily ysoty} -IVJ ‘oouejsiqy ( aL wap? 4TV ayidne Be A Od ‘ITV dozrdne - quit] 4890} -Ie} ‘s0uRysiq. (08 LF OL eI 9F OL tL FF OL GL OF OT sc 16 OL 0S 98 OT itbe SE Op ae ae a oer ae ce 0 SL | cj 6¢ IL 0g L¢ IT 6g 9 IT 61 ¢¢ TT CF LP LL SS a oe ob IL II $b I Ig 1 IT t 66 ON Go 66 9 dey 66 —— Arp. II OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES 480 | | ; Vs gr eas 6 | If: Lp: he ae Sr ed ar | | PY ae? as eel Reales 0 9¢ I | | eae | si Nin ise jar ial RR aes # OU | U -0F 83 de |’ coumig | og ‘ee IL | | : 0, ¢ WH) O 9-88 |" Hvewndee) g ie 1 | \ eee PL) OR C0; RG di ct ae Dae ee | es Ps "UOOP] JO “GY Jour] ( O-LL | ae OF 6S SOT) 8 Sore)! Op “a =i | 0 0 9L |° "Nw tondng| gs ss IL a a Mme ee aL Ol && LI : ora Ara hy teeters ae Es sp 1g IL QL TE. IE OF: 0 wo eae naeeoat aco Si 9 TI 0. 88°96 for’ vr ooumpig | Fo ta “IT 08 ¢ uO oF 46 OL |“ “py wudne | 2.22 IL | i ee \ 0¢ 9 wo OF OE WTP: 2 ae ea ad ~ "WOOK JO “GY UTLTT | O-LL ant OPS - S ie e ee 0 I uo |°* ivy sendng) Of <1 _IT | 0c gp ga” | eo ee be Gi te | | Sanne: Ge Pape | O8* Be GO Geman, ere Se eo TL? 1 . oe | fs ORR OE, (ete cae SOR ee ay | | A OF Bh 98 | comme | sag 2 EE | | i ¢ uo 0 FF 29 «| HV eHdnE | Og F IT ( ie g uo OF SE I@L | * °* HV D | OF T IL | (pyuoo) ojokep | **' 9 feyT “a ' ° IQV FF ‘ “ ‘ ° 8 a q C981 "A ‘opnyisuoy Zuyy[nsoy car | ‘IOLIQ Xopuy ‘eouRj4sIq, pue 4TV *409[q0 “QUILT, | "201d * ni. | . | | SHONV.LSIA UVNOA'T YOA SNOILVAUASAO ie P 481 AT.MAYOLO AND MOUENDI. App. II. ct 9L IT ‘oUN} Oy ‘OUlL} 10,7 *mOOy JO “Y Jourld 0 & OL "OOH: JO “ Jouvyg — O SARE AD: ‘IV topdue OF ~ZP -6 0S Gh 6 co Gb 6 9¢ 6&8 6 cb 8& 6 0 LE 6 ch GE 6 6 $& 6 8I OG OT G& 8h OL CI OF OT cP &F OT L GP OF S& OF OT G¢ & OGL Ws 16 Gt 0 ~-6L -ot co OL @L 0€ GE GTI 0 PL et ol IL GT 0€ 6 GI co Fb GL CF ck) - <6t —- ce ce ete eee Tpuonoyy eee I sung ce es App. Il. . OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES 482 ce LS OT "MOOy JO “A ‘Tou, "OF 8¢-01 | a iene» an “nOOp, jo "yy Jourlg eos | \ “ : ie} “"T fn ee BulyNsoyy | “IO O.-- 9 . HO Ol, 91 82 os 06 99 9L 03 8ST Lb 0S OF 66 as ea ee Oe || OG IF 66 02 g wo 06 69 &L 9 wo 0 96 G8 “ ‘ u“ ! ° ‘1011, XOPUT ‘Q0UvISIC, PUuv "4, ore cee eee eee 6é *** QOUBISTCL nes Se ay ‘ITV toyidne ooe ITV ~y ITV toyrdns eee 66 eee €¢ eee o 6 "+ gouvysTC, IV toyrdne My Ds eee "TW yin “VW toyidne *** 90UBISIC, ‘ITV qtoydne “ay ‘qoalqo &Z S| —_——_-_ Oo 0 Ih OE 0 8G 9g Gg ¥G GG Ae AER SE SR, Pie | | *OUmL, 6¢ a 4 (‘p}t09) IpuoNo} *20V[q t eee See 66 6¢ eee T euu £ a) cg9st ‘aye ‘SHONVLSIG UWYNOT YOOX SNOLLVATHSHO 6 "UOOW JO Mg ( 9-GL | vs | DR bb, [WY ar eg 96 8 : oe | | reo pe wD | 8% 8 | | ( 03 86 06 LE G% 8 | 0¢ LE 06 1s SF 2 II { OF & U0 | 08 LE 06 peti ie Gc. 0 § : | Q .4¢ 06 sé SI 8 | | OF LI wo oO. @ O40 ea ae Ole 4 oe a ee ES SS eee 8 a “. é NOOR JOM IG | TOL vs 0 Lb 8 | “CHV snMsoy | zg IT 8 rs | de 6¢ 6 ES e-) ae ae 6 0g SE 06 | Oo. be 8 02 ZS 06 tr 9 8 a cr Fé é(@L | 0g @ 0 OL Z& 06 -IvoU pes Si F 8 = | 0 08 06 86 0 8 | fz 0% LL u | O08 OF SB. Lie") HYD in9e a9 Z P toe w | 0 26 |" -avsnmioy | oz og 2 |“ vqwmow | 2 oung 2 " ‘uooy Jo “Er 400 qouvlg 0-ZL | pie 0 of LOT | ‘Hv sodng | 246 6 TL < | | bh 6) FO je ORT ee OF. SE 66) (8 68 > IL bs ee oe 03 FL 66 cea ae co 6S) «OCT? ll O2.RE ag be. ea eee Ol SI 66 | ‘°° ““oeoumpig |. 9 TT If | al | G9 8G_ MO) OR Gh Bp i MRED) Ba OR Or | a iss aad eee | |o 9 wo 0% 82 cor |" ‘Hvendue | og Lo OT } es i < "UOOY JO "W JourTg 02 68 $6 | ‘“ayrendne | F Le OL | ee A | OL eS — e Ay fu < OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES 484 SE 06's Uf *MOOP JO "AA IRIS ct €@ ITT O- SER TT “ t] ° "W ‘apnyisuo'TyT Suryqnsoy dua, 0% LT uo 0 9 wo ( 08 3 wo OF LI wo 0 g uO 0g % wo ( 0% LI uo OF 9 wo “ 1 “1OLIG XOPUT ‘SSGONVISICG YYNOA'T YOd SNOILLVAGHSAO 02 SI SL 0Z GI 92 OL 9L 9% OL 9L 9% 0. 9L 92 0° &F 69 0 «(OF OI oF LE 9 03 FI SIT 0¢ SF 06 0 8 06 02 LF 06 OL 9F 06 OF 6I 60I OF FB 69 0. 6" 0H 0§ 6I 90I 03 SF 06 Ol 3b 06 0 GF 06 0 IP 06 0€ 8% ZOL 03 $F IL “ ‘ (e) ‘sourysiq pure “ITV "ary Joyidne qui] qsoq} -Iej ‘oouR sig. ) ( “ary seqidne 5 MV») "* “ATW snpnseyy as ‘IVD eee eee eee 66 ace 66 eee eoueysiq. aa) “+ ary sn doy ——— ATW san soy ee Oe). eoe 46 eee ce *** QOURISTIC, IV D AP snpnsoyy “qoofqoQ ioe} rei Danrnm G&D BD BD re Ton) DamDnmDndno eo ef OD ea hh st “ow, “7 2 ouny c9st ne ae ie ee ea ea! oH «WOOP JO "MOUNT PSL | = | og 8S SIT |‘ ‘ayaondne | 0% sp OL | = | | 08 se 9g [IV | se Te oF | | ( OL ST 8% 0S 6 OL | ) OL FI 8% quit ysoyy || 88 8I OL | 0s 8 II ° g§ wo | OL &L 8% -IBy ‘eoueysiqy us Et 8 | \ 0g ZI 8% \\ cp cL a 0g LIU | OF @ 8g ihe me ate S| BS ee oT | : 02 ¢ wo! OF SE TOL aS ‘ITV toyidne | ¢ ZE OL | | oh 2 $8 9G tn ee (ee Se ZZ 8S It | | - 0€ § UO y) Of TF 96 re ai w§ 96 II | = og €2 46 | “Hy enmpry | ¢ GZ IL |** “erqumosy | *** TT ouur Z 9-IL i 0G GS 621 = as eo 0¢ 8 OL : a ao 3 w | BE WEL deans ace Si 9 OL mS 0 OF OST | "HV 8nInpoIy | GL F OT : Ges ars aa ss were 8 te’ se. 16 | ; = "OUIT} 1O,J ee Oe ae Or OS L8 re ci ee oF 9 6 | = A oo Bo See eS re eee ee | PS . ‘MOOT Jo “GT oUrTT op. 8° cer i te ed GP SG | oe og wo 6L |‘ ‘Wwaoydne | I¢ LE 6 | a ft: 02 Ge BBs | ah it oe 6 OF OL 9% 06 && 6 GL OT UL UE eo ee 0 cL 9% et ye It 18 6 ) O- eh 9e | TL 08 6 | OF LT uo o¢ s¢ Gh |°" “Hvsondne | sh 8% 6 : | ’ y 9 Udo 1 8S 9 A A ae Se ae on SS OBSERVATIONS FOR LUNAR DISTANCES App. IL 486 Ts “UOOT[ JO “M JOULTY cb 2% IT “HOOP JO “M JoUrTT 0€ 82 IT “ 1 o "g ‘opny{Zuory Buy{Nsexy PEL “TTB ‘dua, 09 9F 0% DOE GO: Gee Be cay OUI | cl ¢¢ IT 0 Gh 8@ 28 88 1 og: ar wo!) or gg Pe any | owe: 02 9 wo | OF Gh 6st |° ‘WseNdng| OL Ie II ss 0 Sp 9st | ‘Mv sendne | 9¢ 0% IT o Fo 28 i" " avy | se St I Ol 68 8Z 9F LI II OF 88 8% eg 9L II GF ee ty gh age 8B sre IEE ro CL IT 0 88 8z Le FL It OF 21 BO|5 Gb 0g oe de: sap Ty es ep at 0 9 wm | Oo 0 FE | ‘HY -weHdne | 8% IT IT as 02 GS S@l | °°: Wvwendne | Oo O1 IT 8 ge Mee oe ape et ae og €8 83 ih ug II OF B8 8% o + I Oe Oe i ae eae aay oouRister 0 #9 OL 0 62 8 Gg Zo OL Ot AT. Ue oe Gs! De ae on te or 0 9 tw | O B FIL |" ‘Ny aendng| $1 GP OT u 1 7] Y) O° 8 tu q “1011, XOPUT seacenter pas “IV “yoo(ao okt ull], ‘SHONVILSIDG UVNOAT TOA SNOTILVAWASAO (‘p¥09) srqumo3y | ***T] oune C98T ‘oyeq "208d < 00 jo m qourld ( Apnoyy raopidne | | @ re baer “oe 4 Seal (ie yD | br-er ZI OL Be | > St Bt 0 0 62 oe eens a 0. 8 " Or 8 W4!. oe iy gg [Pag ‘sour | 0% 9L ZL 0 0 8 | el OL ZI | 0b LT uo og z¢ gor | avy | oF 2t at 0F ¢ wo 06 83 “eT |“ sy cording | ae 8 a es - “WOOyy JO “AA yout ‘M Jourrg apn ag 0 9: 98t |" ‘Hwaondne | of 9 aT a BR 5 | A ee ls hy OO Fa 0 02 Se i ( mw oC SI ea) o¢ es 82 a eo a 1 6 I 0B 8°14! oe co gg [fury Soumma | ZT BI é = 0g #9 82 6g 69 II a 0g LI uo OL H8G SORT cee 8 oe rl a ae 0 = a al i es aN OF ¢ uo | OF 63 Set |" ‘Hv Hdne | 6¢ 9¢ II py " _ OOP JO"M OUT —, dies 02 OL @st | ° “iWv-sendug | Le. oo IT OL sl SL0 illinois Sy 2 TA Sl Dal OI 2 8 ot. Ae-aT OL Ig 82 9L 0¢ TI OB iS Ae 08 4 oF ag og. hag comma} St 6F Tl 0 0G 8 og Lh IT | 02 LI uo ae a 2 a TO A | 0% ¢ wo 02 Ff SEI | °° ‘Wy toudne |) eh EF IT oe . bya FL AE ee ROR 09 Sas rss i ell “wooH Jo oo pourtd | O-6L | is 0 Lz 6&1 * yy qoydne | g¢ IF I . - | iain soattileeecall OV Til, ove ow “UV =" i. OL. -. Il “ : 1 ——- ie mr 4 ei . ee ~ wee = ae —— . . = = na a _ eae "UOOH JO “GL OULTY 9-89 ~ : | OF 8 err |< -uvaondng | $F g : 4 oe e 4 we Mit aie 0 0 eee ay ee ee a & o ae eee oe FE SI 6 - OP 03> 99.98 [et Saar ego te = GRP ie Sle ae OF § 6 5 Rahal | lea a ei OF. 2" -6 4 0 & IL 0g g§ wo eee ae ee ae 2 6 S 02 Sb OL | ‘*o0uR BIG | OF OS 8 a OF LI Uo 0 4 0G Oe ae oe eee fe ee 02 Lt | 0 6 FOL |" ‘HY OHdE| 6 9G 8 rs 2 BP cult ees So ees GRE Mies cA 9-L9 =f i. ea ee ae rw S OTT c | 0g sb we | ‘ 96 8 IL = 03 § UO ~ i A || OF 63 26 A ee a a V 0g 9¢ 16 |*" “Hv ®30A | b 69 OT Ciiele: ere? « 91 ¢¢ OT ‘OUIL} IO 0g ¢ uO Or. 6h Get 1% ue ge €¢ OL 0Z S~ OL | ‘Wy serejuy | 06 IG OL |°* Yenoquiory |°*°og ounr " ePS APA: | ree i he ays Vee Piles C98T 3 W ‘OpnyisuoT Surj[usoyy paanee “LOIN XOPUyT sounsia puyaty | pro | ‘OU, gery spate ee ch pee ‘SHONVILSIGA UVNOAT WOK SNC™*¥YAUASAO . 7 % "MOO JO" JoUV[, | 0700 ia FF 08-06 a et OR eee OF 02 99 62L | ° ‘Hv 4toudne | 02 6 OT ok | Tage”) a i A fg ze Lb «(OT : 0 0%@ 9L wi a Paty 9¢ 9 OL Go. % | 0 Ww ee | mn 88 18 6 02 68 29 ‘IV Hnvyuo > | Cp 63 6 03 88. @er | ** be Lb FW 6 0s $ «| 08 Sf Bar | ** wg 08 &% 6 OL 42 Tar | ** ‘Ww tondne | 0% 12 6 | ' *** WoduoW | *** g Alu " ' ° “AUNT " ‘ " ‘ fe) ; 8 mw "V COST “il tepng180077 Supynsex “ny, *“LOLIGT XOpuy OOUNYSICY Pur QTV eet “yoolqo boa va | OOULT sie cee ae Rs nT) PO a er te Meee ‘SHONV.LSIG UVNN'T WO SNOLLVAUASHO 49! ‘AIoPVAIOSGQ YOIMUIeLH Jo “bey ‘uLygung urapy Aq poye[nozeo [Te useq OAVY S}YSIoY pus ‘sepnyzrsuo] ‘sopnytyey Suy[nser oyyy, 7; Oo . S ‘OpnylyT Vy vordg Jo UOT}VAIOSGO PII]} OU} UI 10119 UB ST O10, [— ALON = Reeser ae aH ap | 4 “UOop JO "M IB}g o-TL ag 02 FL OM! | “TV voldg) ‘ZI Le 8 . OF. i, OOTP ee ee ae | (ek! OE Ss Ge soli et GZ oo 8 0h a0 Ca melee ee tee L 1 8 O86 OF: 8 at 1G ae ae eae ee ae b Of 8 0 of cp |< ‘eoumsia | ze sr 8 OL 6 wo 06.8. 28T, (Pte Dek a ol 8 : 0 6 wo OF GZ GZl |" ‘Ny vodg | 3 FH 8 = a e "WOOP JO "AA IRIE 9+TL | 2 | 02 6 sl |" ‘Hw edg| zo oF 8 | a ¢ OG. OF gst fo ary 2s) Oe 2s. -8 _ HEIGHTS OF STATIONS. App. IL 492 ‘posn useq you sey ‘Z), "ON. JojourouLIE YY yurod -Buyiog oy} JO “ZI "AON UO WOI}BALOSQO OIL J, "F11G ELL] JnUS PIT *SHIVUIO LL 08 “Ye ansuequuy | | t¢ | Wt @ i 'g : | 66 66¢ fy 62 71) 6Z eee eee eee eee eee cee eve oursuvdg Zz ef0TS | we0ES. | $8 6S" | ABBE [I ee est: Set oars OS eee ere : 66 66 ke 6z £6 93 siniey 7einig, ciewe > (epi) ihe'eu” feimey ves ss Z Be 66 66 $b 62 0 62 nO ba ae Le a epuoyoN | FZ :: | 66 ce G 6% Ll 62 Geisksole hi. clas ctemebe. gies. e.aael tena SPUIO | 0Z = A “4 Bo oz | fo 6g [ot ee ee os noqnoSry equion | pT a ‘« 1 fo 08 | 3o 6% be ant. EAN NR Ee fre ones | te BR wg. Ae | € 66 Jct ct ttt fpurqg Jo yovq ‘doy-T[tH | ST “! Af 0 0g | #¢ 6% | ** ‘tt (aorearosqo) tfpurqgO ‘feac[-roary | ZT eLIZ TLIZ {8 6% th 66 [ot tt ttt st ifpurqg jo youq ae af i #1 08 |. 2 62 x Hs | BE “3 “| 6 6 | % 62 Bere as i E11Z ZI | #0 OF | &9 62 ge i T ‘Aon ZZ +113 0 08 | $¢ 63. |(ndqnoyo yytH uoYoUN!) wuoagoaop-roary | TE ‘ ae Me G 6 |(vsueag YIM uoHounf) requIorN “foaoT-TOALY | 8% & ce 8 62 bp 66 [ot tt tt tee (doy-T]TY Yowq) tqumMoy | 9% él1Z | 811Z 6 62 G 6% | ‘tt ‘tt (worwarosqo Jo coed) THY IQuMoH | 9g 490 fore. Vere. | EO PRAY to Ba es ae ee ee Laeeeeate "ydog ° 2 (a hen a PR as MS Te Le aa [been y ae ee Soe | ae SS _ — ae "SUOT}EIg “078 qUlog SulTlog | *plorouy ‘SNOILV\LS HO SLHOIGH 493 ‘SOUO JUS OY} O1V TOMA AOYS ]][IM splolouy : FT [~Z puv s[{z oq Avui siyy, , wt ne | et ged 3 08 ‘< LIZ fo 67z fg gg [ctr tte tte cee ee ee ee @Saoxope | zr #8 8 Aa a 7 CT oy) ‘e “e 8 62 © 6G | ttt ct ttt tee ce one eee onSaog | oF 08 2 6z a) a peor oy ug | ZI iG I | 6 ee a 6Z eee in AWOR ete oh oe oe NES ove dIquNosyT 6L 4 = ig 66 | f0 66 |" ct tt tt tt coryesuerd rat - a] lee tn 6c | & 6g [ct tt te ce oe ee quran 08 - s #8 63 | 8% 63 | ct tT ft ttt UpesaorqoON ‘oqurey EL ce ‘6 Fg 62 ty 62 eee eee eee eee eee eee ** TTB SUSI NT z i Ay 6 ee ie) 62 al 6% eee eee eee eee eee eee tee oposv yy gS oun £ Tg Avy 6 [udy CEs HEIGHTS OF STATIONS. ag “ vs to oc | Leg [tt eee ee oT 08 LLG PTS) ge Bee ne ee: Sige pec? ts a ee - SI 6L i a $L 63 | $8 62 |" 7 Cw tow or" OBUTTTA novqiq | ST €8 é 66 L 6Z $2 6% eee eee eee eee e898 ee nowesno,y 6 Z8 ‘6 66 3) Gz $$ 6 Gee esg~ seem, ces “con! ave. “eve Tysoseyy | 6 9) os os ae ce L g Ls or) N mn nn) Z8 66 66 6% fy 62 ‘se > (back hill-top)... ... aa eas 238 Junction of Niembaiwith Ovenga| 1 38 23 143 rae Junction of OfoubouwithOvenga| 1 36 14 re 39 55 Hill-top, back of Obindji_ _..... eae swe 258 268 River-level, Obindji ... ... aie ‘3 54 Nomba, Rigoubou ... om ne “8 369 SPURNS ck see case? vee oon | 2 44 22110 30 - 38 526 Nehonda ... ahh awe "tel 636 Ee ee ae —— | e 429 SEOEMIP ONO'S ves Saas won, ove vee das 503 Lambengué ase 478 Louvendji wen 490 Luba... eh are we | 383 Mandji ow. wee wee vee vee | 1 16 26 | mas a Nagoshi | 322 Fougamou | 347 ae Dihaou (Ovigui) Ce. ee | ne 323 326 MEAGOlG icy ans L, 5h 14 (41 [70.87 |. 498 Nehiengain 1.51 10; 11 14 35] 325 Mokaba my vb 1 BS20 BL) Bb Si 414 Njavi plantation ... s+. ee. eee ees 610 Dogoundou ©... ase ‘eee eee eee vee 473 496 FINAL RESULTS. App, II, | iS en ENG a oer Height above Adopted Adopted | Sea-level by Name of Station. | ame a a opie i paren Ww —a a, haar Sle Igoumbié .. 1 59 22) 11 0 | Ag? ES, “On the ar . + 305 | Yengué 2 0 49 | seit 369 ae Mokenga ... Big! 530 | 508 “On the road ” naa Shae * Bes a : 738 | Madombo... ... 0... ove ae 1226 See ES SOM or sakes end ante 1486 Olako ees — Es 1480 Njavi and Ashango village aes oid C2) ee eee Niembouai 1 58 54/11 56 38{ 1883 e 1910 OMEN TIVE ee | sen non / 1285! “Qn the road” sk aes | 1908 [ Mogiama ... ost |} 2064 |. Mongon 1 56 45 12 3 37| 2488" - Birogou-Bouanga | | 2574 | . Mobana eee ae ee 1 52 56; 2369 | ... Mouaou Kombo | 2074 = * By my own calculation of the boiling-point of water observation, the altitude is 2432 feet. Note.—The apparent discrepancy in the relative height of places near the sea-level arises principally from the fact that the method of observation usually adopted is not sufficiently accurate for the determination of low elevations. ‘The variation in the pressure of the atmosphere during the interval between the observations made on different days at two or more stations, may cause a discordance of several hundred feet, unless a correction be applied for the amount of the variation. The only way to obtain this correction is to have corresponding barometric obser- vations statedly made near the sea, or at a station of known alti. tude. By this means we obtain materials for correcting the observed barometric readings, or of those deduced from the boiling-point thermometer. In practice, however, it has been i ay App. Il. NOTE. 497 found impossible for travellers in the interior of a continent to be assisted in this manner; consequently all heights of African stations lately published, determined from similar observations, are liable to an uncertainty ranging from + 200 feet, on account of this constant varying pressure of the atmosphere. From this it can be easily seen that the absolute and relative heights of stations on a river near the sea-level, must be subject to apparent inconsistencies, or at least to irregularities, if the observations be faithfully made and compnted. Eowin Denki‘. APPENDIX COMPARATIVE TABLE OF WORDS IN SEVERAL English, sun moon star em clouds ... water rain river ae prairie ... firewood warm cold I eat face nose... mouth ... ears head hair body arm leg... hand wife woman ... man... teeth ... mother ... fowls goat = ve. Commt. kombé... ogouaili igaigaini pindi ... aningo... mbéné ... ogoni ... otobi coni.. mpiou ... ifeu mi nia... oune jiou mpombo ogouana arouille ounejiou étoué ... ocouva... ogogo ... Pet ae ago ouinto ... niongon nchoujou intcho ... etoué ... ouinto ... olome ... BNO as. ngouai... njogoni mboni ... Bakalai, or Bakeéle. diobo ... gondai... -... yiatédi... diti madiba mboulo shoulou FOO iyi oath aes soungon : YOR cs; “Kes mbédjé diyebi .... ... boshe ... diolo gouano... baolé ... molé longo ... niolo mbo ... nkodo ... es dikoundjou, hongo ino nialo aus)? wal EDO: “ad52-. Seek? Sie mishi ... diédou... nkéke ... -. momiadi molomo mashoungou miaouen qodbe: 3.6. ASsee ambode | isi. esa Apono, Ashira, Ashango. dioumbi soungui bouaileli disoungou ... manba... fouta rembo ... rébi koumou misandjou ... kagaza ae FURS sins ee ae ee mbasho MGRO wow sca, eae WMP” S87 SEE eee MORO. 255 Swes. mee p< Sei TIGER goss ee BOO 0.) sens ae queto 5.77 Ages oy) ee Ae milembo ... niga. oj... (ccs ditanbi Gu) ea GSD 2. ‘pee L 20. sos eve morning ~—= ees evening eee eee RURBE . vee es COMPARATIVE TABLE OF WORDS Commi. ocondo... ririo, tata mori mbani ... raro nal tani roua roiguenon ... ananal... enongoume... igoume agali ... nago rile 25. 4° wa tako liamba... re mimbo... ouana ouinto ouana olome oga kambi... Ngozo ... njogoni aque obo, mianga shaka ... nehé coco... benda ... ogouasha niaré ... olembai mikenda ibanga neolo ... ogouaira Bakalati, ov Bakele. ako shaouen iéuoto ... béba .. bilali ... benai ... bitani ... na icuoto bitani nabiba bitani nabilali bitani na benai ... dioum ... alaouen talacco madouma - mbila madouma - moco moguéto momogo. mpoumou kambi ... cozhe bashe ... couba ... MAgue... os. doubandja ... shako ... nshé couquai benda ... ouondo... niaché ... bio makemo ... macouadiéshé angolomé . mboulai App. IIL Apono, Ashira, Ashango. dicondai, or digon- dai tate. 3: moshi ... bei iréro irano samano Imayis. 422! “Ge kambo moshi kambo béi ... igoum ... Ae MGA 540° sake Lites botends ~_.2) 5.0 malamou - samba maloumou-mishi MOURME: --_ Ss veks madomba ... es. kambi ... COZO niama ... coco maqué... doubandja ... movega foumou femal oe vas ae GisONEO »> as cwete pagaza. bouya ... magouendo... ... ngouali makali ... nshishiga ... dibeti. App, III. IN Mpovi. makondo ... eee ses eee eee eee eee eee see koumou . eee SEVERAL WESTERN AFRICAN LANGUAGES. Njavi. a THRO". tato mo bioli bitato ... bina bitano ... esamouna sanbo ... pombo... oua goumi... medi neho .- maguielo ... Ishogo. ocondon teta. mpoco ... mbani... tcharo... inai jiani 2s, moroba miasadé, aiba magueshadi - ma- doucou. madoucou-macondo. mouanengué. pal. mobanga. nyozho. niama miagonbei. nchésho. magueé, mezago. movega. koumou. mococo, benda. ndjoma. onbon. diko. ebiti. Obongo. diondi. moi. bei. meta‘o. djimabongo. djio. samouna, nehima, misamouno, nchouma. mbo-ta. shoubou, bouendi. mbolo, liamba, incho. mia kaii. oad i. = MAP mani Vig iit he So NGiiba Riggubou \, ILLUSTRATING M.DU CHAILLWS ROUTES Jieeie EQUATORIAL AFRICA, IN 1864 & GS EBoghsh Miles rs rs) 0 = a7 Mi. die Chailhies Kote. <$<— ae i" SS .S ds a ee Ofoubo Ai ‘ \\ SM CN ~. “et - Nomba; Oba Bo as SE gees Als VALUABLE & INTERESTING WORKS FOR PUBLIC AND PRIVATE LIBRARIES, Pusuisnep sy HARPER & BROTHERS, New York. ge For a full List of Books suitable for Libraries, see Hanprr & Broturrs’ TRADE- List and Cara.oeur, which may be had gratuitously on application to the Publishers personally, or by letter enclosing Ten Cents. Ge Harrer & Brotrurrs will send any of the following works by mail, postage pre- paid, to any part of the United States, on receipt of the price. SCHWEINFURTH’S HEART OF AFRICA. The Heart of Africa: or, Three Years’ Travels and Adventures in the Unexplored Regions of the Centre of Africa. From 1868 to 1871. By Dr. Grore SonwerimnrurtH. Translated by E1- LEN E. Frewer. With an Introduction by Winwoop Reape. Illustrated by about 130 Woodcuts from Drawings made by the Author, and with Two Maps. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $8 00. FLAMMARION’S ATMOSPHERE. The Atmosphere. Translated from the French of CaminLe FLammarion. Edited by Jamys GuarsueER, F.R.S., Superintendent of the Magnetical and Meteorological Department of the Royal Observatory at Greenwich. With 10 Chromo-Lithographs and 86 Woodcuts. 8vo, Cloth, $6 00. HUDSON’S HISTORY OF JOURNALISM. Journalism in the United States, from 1690 to 1872. By Frreprrioxk Hupson. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. PIKE’S SUB-TROPICAL RAMBLES. Sub-Tropical Rambles in the Land of the Aphanapteryx. By Nicoztas Pixr, U.S. Consul, Port Louis, Mauritius. Pro- fusely Illustrated from the Author’s own Sketches; containing also Maps and Valuable Meteorological Charts. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $3 50. HERVEY'S CHRISTIAN RHETORIC. A System of Christian Rhetoric, for the Use of Préachers and Other Speakers. By Grorere Wiyrrepd Hervey, M.A., Author of ‘‘ Rhetoric of Conversation,” &c. Svo, Cloth, $3 50. aay 1 GO A-FISHING. I Goa-Fishing. By W.C. Primz. Crown 8vo, Cloth, 2 50. ANNUAL RECORD OF SCIENCE AND INDUSTRY FOR 1873. Edited by Prof. Srenoer F. Barrp, of the Smithsonian Institution, with the Assistance of Emi- nent Men of Science. 12mo, over 800 pp., Cloth, $2 00. (Uniform with the An- nual Records of Science and Industry for 1871 and 1872. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00.) EVANGELICAL ALLIANCE CONFERENCE, 1873. History, Essays, Orations, and Other Dociments of the Sixth General Conference of the Evangelical Alliance, held in New York, Oct. 2-12, 1873. Edited by Rev. Pairie Sonarr, D.D., and Rev. S. Inenaus Prruez, D.D. With Portraits of Rev. Messrs. Pronier, Carrasco, and Cook, recently deceased. 8vo, Cloth, nearly 800 pages, $6 00. VINCENT’S LAND OF THE WHITE ELEPHANT. The Land of the White Ele- hant: Sights and Scenes in Southeastern Asia. A Personal Narrative of 'ravel and Adventure in Farther India, embracing the Countries of Burma, Siam, Cambodia, and Cochin-China (1871-2). By Franx Vinoent, Jr. Mag- Vio ae a with Map, Plans, and numerous Woodcuts. Crown 8yo, oth, ; ‘ TRISTRAM’S THE LAND OF MOAB. The Result of Travels and Discoveries on the East Side of the Dead Sea and the Jordan. By H. B. Tristram, p.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Master of the Greatham Hospital, and Hon. Canon of Durham. With a Chapter on the Persian Palace of Mashita, by Jas. Fereuson, F.R.S. With Map and Illustrations. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. SANTO DOMINGO, Past and Present; with a Glance at Hayti. By Samurn Hazanp. Maps and Illustrations. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $3 50. SMILES’S HUGUENOTS AFTER THE REVOCATION. The Hucuenots in France after the Revocation of the Edict of Nantes: with a Visit to the Conntry of the Vaudois. By Samurx Suites. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. + 2 Harper & Brothers’ Valuable and Interesting Works. POETS OF THE NINETEENTH CENTURY. The Poets of the Nineteenth Cen- tury. Selected and Edited by the Rev. Roperr Aris Wriitmotr. With English and American Additions, arranged by Evert A. Duyoxrnok, Editor of ‘‘ Cyclo- pzdia of American Literature.” Comprising Selections from the Greatest Au- thors of the Age. Superbly Illustrated with 141 Engravings from Designs by the most Eminent Artists. In elegant small 4to form, printed on Superfine Tinted Paper, richly bound in extra Cloth, Beveled, Gilt Edges, $5 00; Half Calf, $5 50; Full Turkey Morocco, $9 00. fHE REVISION OF THE ENGLISH VERSION OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. bets an Introduction by the Rev. P. Souarr, D.D. 618 pp., Crown 8yo, Cloth, 00. This work embraces in one volume: f I.ON A FRESH REVISION OF THE ENGLISH NEW TESTAMENT. By J. B. Ligurroot, D.D., Canon of St. Paul’s, and Hulsean Professor of Divinity, Cambridge. Second Edition, Revised. 196 pp. IIl.ON THE AUTHORIZED VERSION OF THE NEW TESTAMENT in Connection with some Recent Proposals for its Revision. By Riowarp CuENEVIX TRENCH, D.D., Archbishop of Dublin. 194 pp. III. CONSIDERATIONS ON THE REVISION OF THE ENGLISH VERSION OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. By J. C. Exuicort, D.D., Bishop of Glou- cester and Bristol]. 178 pp. NORDHOFF’S CALIFORNIA. California: For Health, Pleasure, and Residence, A Book for Travelers and Settlers. Illustrated. 8vo, Paper, $2 00; Cloth, $2 50, MOTLEY’S DUTCH REPUBLIC. The Rise of the Dutch Republic. By Joun Lo- tuRoP Mortrey, LL.D., D.C.L. With a Portrait of William of Orange. 3 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $10 50. MOTLEY’S UNITED NETHERLAND'’S. History of the United Netherlands: from the Death of William the Silent to the Twelve Years’ Truce—1609. With a full View of the English-Dutch Sneee against Spain, and of the Origin and De- struction of the Spanish Armada. By Joun Loruror Morttey, LL.D., D.C.L. Portraits. 4 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $14 00. MOTLEY’S LIFE AND DEATH OF JOHN OF BARNEVELD. Life and Death of John of Barneveld, Advocate of Holland. With a View of the Primary Causes and Movements of ‘‘The Thirty Years’ War.” By Joun Lorurop Mort- Ley, D.C.L. With Illustrations. In Two Volumes. 8vo, Cloth, $7 00. HAYDN’S DICTIONARY OF DATES, relating to all Ages and Nations. For Uni- versal Reference. Edited by Brensamin VINOENT, Assistant Secretary and Keeper of the Library of the Royal Institution of Great Britain; and Revised for the Use of American Readers. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, $6 00. MACGREGOR’S ROB ROY ON THE JORDAN. The Rob Boy on the Jordan, Nile, Red Sea, and Gennesareth, &c. A Canoe Cruise in Palestine and Egypt, and the Waters of Damascus. By J. Maocrecor, M.A. With Maps and Llus- trations. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. WALLACE’S MALAY ARCHIPELAGO. The Malay Archipelago: the Land of the Orang-Utan and the Bird of Paradise. A Narrative of Travel, 1854-1862. With Studies of Man and Nature. By Atrrep Russexr Wartace. With Ten Maps and Fifty-one Elegant Illustrations. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. WHYMPER’S ALASKA. Travel and Adventure in the Territory of Alaska, for- merly Russian America—now Ceded to the United States—and in various other parts of the North Pacific. By FrepEeriok WuyMmrPer. With Map and Illustrae tions. Crown S8yvo, Cloth, $2 50. ORTON’S ANDES AND THE AMAZON. The Andes and the Amazon; or, Across the Continent of South America. By James Orvron, M.A., Professor of Natural History in Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, N. Y., and Corresponding Member of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia. With a New Map of Equatorial America and numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. WINCHELL’S SKETCHES OF CREATION. Sketches of Creation: a Popular View of some of the Grand Conclusions of the Sciences in reference to the His- tory of Matter and of Life. Together with a Statement of the Intimations of Science respecting the Primordial Condition and the Ultimate Destiny of the Earth and the Solar System. By ALEXANDER WINCHELL, LL.D., Professor of Geology, Zoology, and Botany in the University of Michigan, and Director of the State Geological Survey. With Illustrations. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00. WHITE’S MASSACRE OF ST. BARTHOLOMEW. The Massacre of St. Bartholo- mew: Preceded by a History of the Religious Wars in the Reign of Charles IX. By Henry Wuitt, M.A. With Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $1 75. Harper & Brothers’ Valuable and Interesting Works. 3 LOSSING’S FIELD-BOOK OF THE REVOLUTION. Pictorial Field-Book of the Revolution; or, Illustrations, by Pen and Pencil, of the History, Biography, Scenery, Relics, and Traditions of the War for Independence. By Benson J. Lossine. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $14 00; Sheep, $15 00; Half Calf, $18 00; Full Turkey Morocco, $22 00. LOSSING’S FIELD-BOOK OF THE WAR OF 1812. Pictorial Field-Book of the War of 1812; or; Illustrations, by Pen and Pencil, of the History, Biography, Scenery, Relics, and Traditions of the Last War for American Independence. By Benson J. Lossrne. With several hundred Engravings on Wood, by Lossing and Barritt, chiefly from Original Sketches by the Author. 1088 pages, 8vo, Cloth, $7 00; Sheep, $8 50 ;» Half Calf, $10 00. ALFORD’S GREEK TESTAMENT. The Greek Testament: with a critically revised Text; a Digest of Various Readings; Marginal References to Verbal and Idio- matic Usage; Prolegomena; and a Critical and Exegetical Commentary. For the Use of Theological Students and Ministers. By Henry Atrorp, D.D., Dean of Canterbury. Vol. I., containing the Four Gospels. 944 pages, S8vo, Cloth, $6 00; Sheep, $6 50. ABBOTT’S FREDERICK THE GREAT. The History of Frederick the Second, oe oo the Great. By Joun S.C. Azssotr. Elegantly Illustrated. 8vo, oth, F ABBOTT’S HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION. The French Revolu- tion of 1789, as viewed in the Light of Republican Institutions. By Joun S. C. An. Bott. With 100 Engravings. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. ABBOTT’S NAPOLEON BONAPARTE. The History of Napoleon Bonaparte. By Joun S.-C. Assotr. With Maps, Woodcuts, and Portraits on Steel. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $10 00. ABBOTT'S NAPOLEON AT ST. HELENA; or, Interesting Anecdotes and Remark- able Conversations of the Emperor during the Five and a Half Years of his Captivity. Collected from the Memorials of Las Casas, O’Meara, Montholon, ash” and others. By Joun S. C. Assotr. With Illustrations. 8vo, oth, S ADDISON’S COMPLETE WORKS. The Works of Joseph Addison, embracing the whole of the ‘‘Spectator.” Complete in 3 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $6 00. ALCOCK’S JAPAN. The Capital of the Tycoon: a Narrative of a Three Years’ Residence in Japan. By Sir Rururrrorp Atcook, K.C.B., Her Majesty’s Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiaryin Japan. With Maps and Engravings. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 50. ALISON’S HISTORY OF EUROPE. First Series: From the Commencement of the French Revolution, in 1789, to the Restoration of the Bourbons, in 1815. [In addition to the Notes on Chapter LXXVI., which correct the errors of the original work concerning the United States, a copious Analytical Index has been appended to this American edition.] Srconp Serirs: From the Fall of Napoleon, in 1815, to the Accession of Louis Napoleon, in 1852. 8 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $16 00. BALDWIN’S PRE-HISTORIC NATIONS. Pre-Historic Nations; or, Inquiries con- cerning some of the Great Peoples and Civilizations of Antiquity, and their Probable Relation to a still Older Civilization of the Ethiopians or Cushites of Arabia. By Joun D. Batpwin, Member of the American Oriental Society. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. BARTH’S NORTH AND CENTRAL AFRICA. Travels and Discoveries in North and Ceutra]l Africa: being a Journal of an Expedition undertaken under the Auspices of H. B. M.’s Government, in the Years 1849-1855. By Henry Barr, Ph.D., D.C.L. Ilustrated. 3 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $12 00. HENRY WARD BEECHER'S SERMONS. Sermons by Henry Warp Brecuer, Plymouth Church, Brooklyn. Selected from Published and Unpublished Dis- courses, and Revised by their Author. With Steel Portrait. Complete in 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. LYMAN BEECHER'S AUTOBIOGRAPHY, &o. Autobiography, Correspondence, &c., of Lyman Beecher, D.D. Edited by his Son, Cuaries Bercurr. With Three Steel Portraits, and Engravings on Wood. In 2 yols., 12mo, Cloth, $500. ° BOSWELL’S JOHNSON. The Life of Samuel Johnson. LL.D. Including a Journey to the Hebrides. By James Boswett, Esq. A New Edition, with numerous Additions and Notes. By Joun Witson Croxer, LL.D., F.R.S. Portrait of Boswell. 2vols., 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. 4 Harper & Brothers’ Valuable and Interesting Works, DRAPER’S CIVIL WAR. History of the American Civil War. By Joun W. Dra: PER, M.D., LL.D., Professor of Chemistry and Physiology in the University of New York. InThree Vols. 8vo, Cloth, $3 50 per vol. DRAPER’S INTELLECTUAL DEVELOPMENT OF EUROPE. A History of the Intellectual Development of Europe. By Jonn W. Drarenr, M.D., LL.D., Profess- or of Chemistry and Physiology in the University of New York. S8vo, Cloth, $5 00. DRAPER’S AMERICAN CIVIL POLICY. Thoughts on the Future Civil Policy of America. By Joun W. Draper, M.D., LL.D., Professor of Chemistry and Physiol- ogy in the University of New York. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $2 50. DU CHAILLU’S AFRICA. Explorations and Adventures in Equatorial Africa with Accounts of the Manners and Customs of the People, and of the Chase of the Go- Trilla, the Crocodile, Leopard, Elephant, Hippopotamus, and other Animals. By Pau. B. Du CHartiv. ‘Numerous Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. : BELLOWS'S OLD WORLD. The Old World in its New Face: Impressions of En- rope in 1867-1868. By Henry W. Betiows. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 50. BRODHEAD'S HISTORY OF NEW YORK. History of the State of New York. By Joun Romern BropuHeaD. 1609-1691. 2 vols. 8vo, Cloth, $3 00 per vol. BROUGHAM’S AUTOBIOGRAPHY. Life and Times of Henry, Lorp BroveHam. Written by Himself. In Three Volumes. 12mo, Cioth, $2 00 per vol. BULWER’S PROSE WORKS. Miscellaneous Prose Works of Edward Bulwer, Lord Lytton. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 50. BULWER’S HORACE. The Odes and Epodes of Horace. A Metrical Translation into English. With Introduction and Commentaries. By Lorp Lyrron. With Latin Text from the Editions of Orelli, Macleane, and Yonge. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. BULWER'S KING ARTHUR. A Poem. By Eazt Lyrron. NewEdition. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. BURNS’S LIFE AND WORKS. The Life and Works of Robert Burns. Edited by Rosert CHamsBers. 4 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $6 00. REINDEER, DOGS, AND SNOW-SHOES. A Journal of Siberian Travel and Ex- plorations made in the Years 1865-67. By Ricuarp J. Busu, late of the Russo- American Telegraph Expedition. Illustrated. Crown 8vo, Cloth, $3 00. CARLYLE’S FREDERICK THE GREAT. History of Friedrich I1., called Frederick Clot $1 00 By Tuomas Cartyte. Portraits, Maps, Plans, &c. 6 vols., 12mo, oth, % CARLYLE'S FRENCH REVOLUTION. History ofthe French Revolution. Newly Revised by the Author, with Index, &c. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 50. CARLYLE’S OLIVER CROMWELL. Letters and Speeches of Oliver Cromwell. With Elucidations and Connecting Narrative. 2 vols.,12mo, Cloth, $3 50. CHALMERS’S POSTHUMOUS WORKS. The Posthumous Works of Dr. Chalmers. Edited by his Son-in-Law, Rey. Witt1am Hanna, LL.D. Complete in 9 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $13 50. COLERIDGE’S COMPLETE WORKS. The Complete Works of Samuel Taylor Coleridge. With an Introductory Essay upon his Philosophical and Theological Opinions. Edited by Professor SHepp. Complete in Seven Vols. With a fine Portrait. Small 8vo, Cloth, $10 50. DOOLITTLE’S CHINA. Social Life of the Chinese: with some Account of their Re- ligious, Governmental, Educational, and Business Customs and Opinions. With special but not exclusive Reference to Fuhchau. By Rev. Justus DooriTrtez, Fourteen Years Member of the Fuhchau Mission of the American Board. Ilus- be isbn more than 150 characteristic Engravings on Wood. 2 vols., 12mo, ot 5 . GIBBON’S ROME. History of the Decline and Fali of the Roman Empire. By Ep- WARD Gipson. With Notes by Rev. H. H. Mitman and M. Guizor. A newchea Edition. To which is added a complete Index of the whole Work, and a Portrait of the Author. 6 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $9 00. HAZEN’S SCHOOL AND ARMY IN GERMANY AND FRANCE. The School and the Army in Germany and France, with a Diary of Siege Life at Versailles. By Brevet Major-General W. B. Hazen, U.S.A., Colonel Sixth Infantry. Crown Svo, Cloth, $2 50. Harper & Brothers’ Valuable and Interesting Works. 5 HARPER’S NEW CLASSICAL LIBRARY. Literal Translations. The following Volumes are now ready. Portraits. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50 each. Cxsar. —VinGiL. — SaLttust. — Horace.—Cricero’s ORATIONS.—C10ERO’S OFFICER: &c.—CioERO oN Oratory AND Orartors.—Taoitus (2 vols.). — TERENCE. — SoPHOoLES.—J UVENAL.—XENOPHON.— HomeEr’s In1ap.—Homer’s Opyssry.— Heroporus.—DeEMOsTHENES.—THUOYDIDES.—_AisCHYLUS.—EURIPIDES (2 vols.). —Livy (2 vols.). DAVIS’S CARTHAGE. Carthage and her Remains: being an Account of the Exca- vations and Researches on the Site of the Pheenician Metropolis in Africa and other adjacent Places. Conducted under the Auspices of Her Majesty’s Government. By Dr. Davis, F.R.G.S. Profusely Illustrated with Maps, Woodcuts, Chromo- Lithographs, &c. 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. EDGEWORTH’S (Miss) NOVELS. With Engravings. 10 vols.,12mo, Cloth, $15 00. GROTE’S HISTORY OF GREECE. 12 vols.,12mo, Cloth, $18 00. HELPS’S SPANISH CONQUEST. The Spanish Conquest in America, and its Rela- , tion to the History of Slavery and to the Government of Colonies. By Arruur Hetrs. 4vols., 12mo, Cloth, $6 00. HALE’S (Mras.) WOMAN’S RECORD. Woman's Record; or, Biographical Sketches of all Distinguished Women, from the Creation to the Present Time. Arranged in Four Eras, with Selections from Female Writers of each Era. By Mrs. Saran JosrpHa Hatz. Illustrated with more than 200 Portraits. S8vo, Cloth, $5 00. HALL’S ARCTIC RESEARCHES. Arctic Researches and Life among the Esquix maux: being the Narrative of an Expedition in Search of Sir John Franklin, in the Years 1860, 1861, and 1862. By Cuartes Francis Harty. With Maps and 106 Illustrations. The Illustrations are from Original Drawings by Charles Parsons, Henry L. Stephens, Solomon Eytinge, W. S. L. Jewett, and Granville Perkins, after Sketches by Captain Hall. 8vo, Cloth, $5 00. HALLAM’S CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY OF ENGLAND, from the Accession of Henry VIL. to the Death of George II. 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. HALLAM’S LITERATURE. [Introduction to the Literature of Europe during the Fifteenth, Sixteenth, and Seventeenth Centuries. By Henry Hatiam. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. HALLAM’S MIDDLE AGES. State of Europe during the Middle Ages. By Henry Hatiam. 8vo, Cloth, $2 00. HILDRETH'S HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES. First Serres: From the First Settlement of the Country to the Adoption of the Federal Constitution. Srconp Series: From the Adoption of the Federal Constitution to the End of the Sixteenth Congress. 6 vols., Svo, Cloth, $18 00. HUME’S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. History of England, from the Invasion of Ju- lius Cesar to the Abdication of James II., 1688. By Davin Hume. A new Edi- tion, with the Author's last Corrections and Improvements. To which is Prefix- ed a short Account of his Life, written by Himself. With a Portrait of the Au- thor. 6 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $9 00. JAY'S WORKS. Complete Works of Rey. William Jay: comprising his Sermons, Family Discourses, Morning and Evening Exercises for every Day in the Year, on Prayers, &c.. Author's enlarged Edition, revised. 3 vols., Svyo, Cloth, JEFFERSON’S DOMESTIC LIFE. The Domestic Life of Thomas Jefferson: com- piled from Family Letters and Reminiscences by his Great-Granddaughter, Saran N. Ranpoips. With Illustrations. Crown 8va, I]luminated: Cloth, Bev- eled Edges, $2 50. JOHNSON’S COMPLETE WORKS. The Works of Samuel Johnson, LL.D. With an Essay on his Life and Genius, by ArtHur Murpuy, Esq. Portrait of Johnsom 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. KINGLAKE’S CRIMEAN WAR. The Invasion of the Crimea, and an Account of its Progress down to the Death of Lord Raglan. By AuexanpEer WriiiaM Krxa- LAKE. With Maps and Plans. Two Vols. ready. 12mo, Cloth, $2 00 per vol. KINGSLEY’S WEST INDIES. At Last: A Christmas in the West Indies. By Cuagces Kinestey. Illustrated. 12mo, Cloth, $1 50. i. 6 Harper & Brothers’ Vatuable and Interesting Works. KRUMMACHER’S DAVID, KING OF ISRAEL. David, the King of Israel: a Por- trait drawn from Bible History and the Book of Psalms. By Freprerick WILLIAM Kroummacger, D.D., Author of ‘‘ Elijah the Tishbite,” &c. Translated under the express Sanction of the Author by the Rev. M. G. Easton, M.A. With a Letter a1 Dr. Krummacher to his American Readers, and a Portrait. 12mo, Cloth, LAMB’S COMPLETE WORKS. The Works of Charles Lamb. Comprising his Let- ters, Poems, Essays of Elia, Essays upon Shakspeare, Hogarth, &c., and a Sketch of his Life, with the Final Memorials, by T. Noon Tatrourp. Portrait. 2 vols., 12mo, Cloth, $3 00. LIVINGSTONE’'S SOUTH AFRICA. Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa; including a Sketch of Sixteen Years’ Residence in the Interior of Africa, and a Journey from the Cape of Good Hope to Loando on the West Coast; thence across the Continent, down the River Zambesi, to the Eastern Ocean. By Davip LrvinestoneE, LL.D., D.C.L. With Portrait, Maps by Arrowsmith, and numerous fllustrations. Svo, Cloth, $4 50. LIVINGSTONES’ ZAMBESI. Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambesi and its Tributaries, and of the Discovery of the Lakes Shirwa and Nyassa. 1858-1864. By Davip and Cuarzises Livingstone. With Map and Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, 00. M‘CLINTOCK & STRONG’S CYCLOPADIA. Cyclopedia of Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature. Prepared by the Rey. Joun M‘Curntocx, D.D., and James Strone, 8.T.D. 5 vols. now ready. Royal 8vo. Price per vol., Cloth, $5 00; Sheep, $6 00; Half Morocco, $8 00. MARCY’S ARMY LIFE ON THE BORDER. Thirty Years of Army Life on the Border. Comprising Descriptions of the Indian Nomads of the Plains; Explo- rations of New Territory; a Trip across the Rocky Mountains in the Winter; Descriptions of the Habits of Different Animals found in the West, and the Meth- ods of Hunting them; with Incidents in the Life of Different Frontier Men, &c., &c. By Brevet Brigadier-General R. B. Marcy, U.S.A., Author of “The Prairie Traveller.”” With numerous Illustrations. Svo, Cloth, Beveled Edges, $3 00. MACAULAY’S HISTORY OF ENGLAND. ‘The History of England from the Ac- cession of James II. By THomas Basineton Macatray. With an Original Por- trait of the Author. 5 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $10 00; 12mo, Cloth, $7 50. MOSHEIM’S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, Ancient and Modern; in which the ae Progress, and Variation of Church Power are considered in their Connec- ion with the State of Learning and Philosophy, and the Political History of Eu- rope during that Period. Translated, with Notes, &c., by A. Macrarng, D.D. A new Edition, continued to 1826, by C. Cootr, LL.D. 2 vols., 8vo, Cloth, $4 00. NEVIUS’S CHINA. China and the Chinese: a General Descripticn of the Country and its Inhabitants; its Civilization and Form of Government; its Religious and Social Institutions; its Intercourse with other Nations; and its Present Condition and Prospects. By the Rev. Joun L. Nevivs, Ten Years a Missionary in China. With a Map and Illustrations. 12mo, Cloth, $1 75. THE DESERT OF THE EXODUS. Journeys on Foot in the Wilderness of the Forty Years’ Wanderings; undertaken in connection with the Ordnance Puree of Sinai and the Palestine Exploration Fund. By E. H. Parmer, M.A., Lor Almoner’s Professor of Arabic, and Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge. With Maps and numerous Illustrations from Photographs and Drawings taken on the spot by the Sinai Survey Expedition and C. F. Tyrwhitt Drake. Crown 8yo, Cloth, $3 00. OLIPHANT’S CHINA AND JAPAN. Narrative of the Earl of Elgin’s Mission to China and Japan, in the Years 1857, °58, 59. By Laurence OLIPHANT, Private Secretary to Lord Elgin. Illustrations. 8vo, Cloth, $3 50. OLIPHANT’S (Mrs.) LIFE OF EDWARD IRVING. _ The Life of Edward Irving Minister of the National Scotch Church, London. Illustrated by his Journals an Correspondence. By Mrs. OrirHant. Portrait. Svo, Cloth, $3 50. RAWLINSON’S MANUAL OF ANCIENT HISTORY. A Manual of Ancient His- tory, from the Earliest Times to the Fall of the Western Empire. Comprising the History of Chaldza, Assyria, Media, Babylonia, Lydia, Pheenicia, Syria, Ju- da, Egypt, Carthage, Persia, Greece, Macedonia, Parthia, and Rome. | By Grorce Rawtrson, M.A., Camden Professor of Ancient History in the Univer- sity of Oxford. 12mo, Cloth, $2 50. i ¢. 930 rl A Ne by ty § € b os : : ‘ ‘ ’ r ‘ ’ +) i? ; 7 Lest h teth % i, i +} ) ® ' by! : ; \ < et i ‘J ¥. - é i we \f on ; U8 | i , i \ 7%) } oy 1 C0 aN 4 oe! i } * ‘ ef \ ’ ‘ ; a 1% , A ‘ 5 Nal ; Ae en he be “w Ar te I Pi ‘ = a a f. r } my Fy viva or y yO i) i y : ni 5 »Y n% ; ' » ’ yt god 7 Seer | j ‘tars “ 4 Lives “/ Ovi tae i wn ) AS ‘ +4 } ] is W | j pi? Ve ‘ * ie Oh Pb \ ' 5 Ng pi , \ y wé A 4, if fa eS AD any bt! 3 ae } Ay Uae ae 9 , . > Us ” i) [he * ' a aa ee he Bangi? Aiuis* A| ST Vips tah r ; i AEM: + Ti ‘I re A} ¢ et oa f + Ws ry ye ae > ae Lay I | ne J a a0 be ' ; by 1 a 4 eS A 7, ; 4 ney } y . * ys iv a pS OV eae Pitre j » f IBR Tawi 0 029 988 378 4